User’s Guide
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-626xFW Series
BASIC
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and
troubleshooting on windows.
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and
troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
Key benefits
•
Fast, on-demand printing.
Environmentally friendly
-
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series
For single-side printing, 18 ppm (A4) or 19 ppm (Letter).
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
▪
-
▪
▪
For single-side printing, 24 ppm (A4) or 25 ppm (Letter).
For duplex printing, 12 ppm (A4) or 12 ppm (Letter).
•
•
•
•
To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature (see "Eco
Convenience
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided
To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
•
•
You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google
Cloud Print™ enabled apps (see "Google Cloud Print™" on page 219).
Fast high resolution printing
Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Easy Capture
•
•
Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that
monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to
customize the machine’s settings (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
•
•
You can print in a full range of colors using cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan,
compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax (see
You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600
x 600 x 4 bit).
Key benefits
•
•
•
AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the
ordinary program (see "Samsung AnyWeb Print" on page 308).
Supports various wireless network setting method
Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available
only for Windows.
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads.
•
•
•
Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) button
-
You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on
the machine and the access point (a wireless router).
Wide range of functionality and application support
Using the USB cable or a network cable
-
You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB
cable or a network cable.
Using the Wi-Fi Direct
-
You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or
Wi-Fi Direct feature.
•
•
Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 146).
Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as
•
•
You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.
Features by models
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.
Operating System
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Operating System
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
Windows
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Mac
Linux
Unix
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Software
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window.
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Software
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
SPL printer driver
PCL printer driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Features by models
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Software
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
PS printer driver
XPS printer driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
a
Direct Printing Utility
Samsung Easy Printer Scan to PC settings
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Manager
Fax to PC settings
●
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-
626xFR Series only)
Device Settings
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Samsung Printer Status
Samsung AnyWeb Print
Samsung Easy Document Creator
Easy Capture Manager
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Samgung Easy Color Manager
SyncThru™ Web Service
SyncThru Admin Web Service
Easy Eco Driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Features by models
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Software
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
Fax
Samsung Network PC Fax
●
●
●
●
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-
626xFR Series only)
Scan
Twain scan driver
WIA scan driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Samsung Scan Assistant
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Features by models
Variety feature
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Features
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000
Base TX wired LAN
a
○
○
●
IEEE 1284B parallel connector
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless
●
b
LAN
Google Cloud Print™
AirPrint
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Eco printing
●
●
●
●
Duplex (2-sided) printing
cd
●
●
Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual)
USB memory interface
Memory module
●
○
●
○
●
○
○
●
○
○
Optional tray (Tray2)
Mass Storage Device
e
●
Features by models
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Features
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
Document Duplex Automatic Document
●
●
Feeder
Feeder (DADF)
(CLX-626xFR Series only)
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF)
●
●
●
(CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series only)
Handset
Features by models
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Features
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
Fax
Multi-send
●
●
●
●
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
Delay send
●
●
●
●
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
Priority send
Duplex send
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(CLX-626xFR Series only)
Secure receive
●
●
●
●
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
Duplex print
●
(CLX-626xFR Series only)
Send/ Receive forward - fax
Send/ Receive forward - email
●
●
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
●
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
Send/ Receive forward -
server
●
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
Features by models
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Features
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
Scan
Scanning to email
Scanning to SMB server
Scanning to FTP server
Duplex scan
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(CLX-626xFR Series only)
Scan to PC
●
●
●
●
Features by models
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
Features
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xFW Series
Copy
ID card copying
Reduced or enlarged copying
Collation
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Poster
Clone
Auto Fit
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Book
2-up/4-up
Adjust background
Margin shift
Edge erase
●
●
●
●
Gray enhance
Duplex copy
a. If you use the parallel port, you cannot use the USB cable.
b. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you
bought your machine.
c. Available for Windows OS only.
d. Only tray1 is supported.
e. The machine is equipped with 4GB of SD (secure digital) card.
( ●: Included, ○: Optional, Blank: Not available)
Useful to know
A paper jam has occurred.
The machine does not print.
•
•
Open and close the door (see "Front view" on page 21).
•
•
•
Open the print queue list and remove the document from the
Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper
Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver
Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows
Printouts are blurry.
•
•
•
The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
Try a different print resolution setting (see "Opening printing
•
•
Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.
Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner
Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region
to view product service information.
Where can I download the machine’s driver?
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.
•
manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
Downloads.
•
•
Turn the product off and on again.
Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and
About this user’s guide
2
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.
General icons
•
•
Read the safety information before using the machine.
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting
chapter.
Icon
Text
Description
Gives users information to protect the machine
•
•
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.
Caution from possible mechanical damage or
malfunction.
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or model you purchased.
Provides additional information or detailed
Note
specification of the machine function and
feature.
•
The screenshots in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
•
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
1
Conventions
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
•
•
•
Document is synonymous with original.
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
Machine refers to printer or MFP.
14
1. Introduction
Safety information
4
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
Operating environment
Warning
3
Important safety symbols
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is
not grounded.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe
personal injury or death.
Warning
This could result in electric shock or fire.
•
•
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off
the power switch and unplug the machine.
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor
Caution
personal injury or property damage.
The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.
Do not attempt.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy
object could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the
plug with wet hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
15
1. Introduction
Safety information
5
Caution
Operating method
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Burns could occur.
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
It can cause damage to the machine.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and
request assistance from qualified service personnel.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper
tray.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
You may get injured.
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Burns can occur.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal
objects.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could
result in electric shock.
It can damage the machine.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.
It can damage the machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.
16
1. Introduction
Safety information
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
Caution
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can
cause damage or fire.
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the
units weight.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do
not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate
amount of people to lift the device safety.
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Then lift the machine:
•
•
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.
6
If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift
with 2 people.
Installation / Moving
•
If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or
more people.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Warning
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water
leaks.
a
Use only No.26 AWG or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
17
1. Introduction
Safety information
7
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or
larger.
Maintenance / Checking
Caution
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result
in electric shock or fire.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock
or fire.
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
The machine should be connected to
You could get injured.
the power level which is specified on the label.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
Children could get hurt.
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,
contact the electrical utility company.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the
machine needs repairing.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide
provided with the machine.
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
18
1. Introduction
Safety information
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away
from children.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
•
•
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the
machine.
Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in
fire or electric shock.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service
fee will be charged.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
•
The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
8
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Supply usage
Caution
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser
unit.
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.
19
1. Introduction
Machine overview
9
Accessories
Power cord
Quick installation guide
a
b
Software CD
Misc. accessories
a. The software CD contains the print drivers, user’s guide, and software applications.
b. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.
20
1. Introduction
Machine overview
10
1
2
3
4
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) cover
12
13
14
Front view
Front cover handle
Scanner lid
Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) width guide
•
•
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.
There are various types of machine.
Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) input tray
Scanner glass
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) output tray
15 Paper width guides on a manual
feeder
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-419xFW/ CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
5
6
Control panel
16 Manual feeder
17 Paper width guides on a multi-
Control board cover
13
a
2
1
purpose tray
14
G
7
18
3
Front cover
Tray 1
Multi-purpose support tray
12
10
8
9
19 Toner cartridge
15
16
4
5
USB memory port
20 Toner cartridge handle
21 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
11
10 Output tray
11 Document feeder output support
a. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series only.
17
6
7
18
19
20
9
8
21
21
1. Introduction
Machine overview
4
Dual Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) output tray
16
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
Scanner lid
5
6
Control panel
17 Scanner glass
16
1
2
17
18 Paper width guides on a multi-
purpose tray
Control board cover
15
3
14
13
7
8
9
Front cover
Tray 1
19 Multi-purpose support tray
20 Toner cartridge
18
19
4
5
a
21 Toner cartridge handle
Optional tray
6
7
8
20
21
10 Push-release of Multi-purpose
tray
22
Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
22
11 Multi-purpose tray
12 USB memory port
23 Duplex jam cover
12
23
9
10
11
a. This is an optional feature. CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only.
1
2
3
Dual Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) cover
13
14
15
Output tray
Dual Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) width guide
Document feeder output support
Front cover handle
Dual Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) input tray
22
1. Introduction
Machine overview
11
Rear view
•
•
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model. There are various types of machine.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 5).
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
9
10
9
10
8
8
7
7
6
5
4
5
4
1
1
3
2
3
2
1
4
7
10
Waster toner container
Rear cover
Power receptacle
Power-switch
USB port
Extension telephone socket (EXT.)
2
3
5
6
8
9
Network port
ab
c
Rear cover handle
5V output port for IEEE 1284B parallel connector
Telephone line socket (LINE)
a. This is an optional feature. CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only.
b. The optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector can be used by plugging in both the USB port and the 5V output port.
c. CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only.
23
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
•
•
•
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. There are various types of control panels.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 5).
Some buttons may not work depending on the mode (copy, fax, or scan).
12
Type A(CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series)
4
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
7
13
19
15
14
18
21
20
17
16
6
1
2
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading, when the original contains faint markings and dark images.
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID card copying" on page
a
ID Copy
b
Sends scanned data.
Scan to
24
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
3
4
Display screen
Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.
Switches to Copy mode.
Copy
5
Switches to Fax mode.
Fax
6
7
8
9
Arrows
Scroll through the options available in the selected menu, and increase or decrease values.
Confirms the selection on the screen.
OK
Numeric keypad
Address Book
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 260).
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers (see "Storing email address" on page 258
10
11
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit
mode (see "Redialing the fax number" on page 292).
Redial/Pause
Stops current operation.
Stop/Clear
12
13
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press
this button for more than three seconds.
Power/Wakeup
Begins a printing job in color mode.
Color
Start
Begins a printing job in black and white mode.
Black
14
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker
On Hook Dial
25
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
15
16
17
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
Back
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (see "Menu overview" on page 33).
Switches to Scan mode.
Menu
Scan
18
Show the status of each toner cartridge. If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced, the Status LED turns red and
the display shows the message. However, the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with
a new cartridge (see "Toner-related messages" on page 137).
Toner colors
19 Status LED
Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 134).
20
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc-printing and copying only (see "Eco printing"
Eco
21
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your
machine.
Direct USB
a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only.
b. CLX-419xN/ CLX-626xND Series only.
26
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
13
Type B(CLX-419xFW/ CLX-626xFW Series)
1
2
3
Display screen
Numeric keypad
Clear
Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation.
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 260).
Deletes characters in the edit area.
4
5
Stops an operations at any time.
Stop
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this
button for more than three seconds.
Power/
Wakeup
27
1. Introduction
Control panel overview
6
Starts a job in black or color mode.
Start
7
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone
On Hook Dial
Help
8
9
Gives detailed information about this machine’s menus or status.
Reset
Resets the current machine’s setup.
10 Wireless LED
Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 134).
Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 134).
11 Status LED
28
1. Introduction
Turning on the machine
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.
1
Turn the power switch on.
2
2
1
29
1. Introduction
Installing the driver locally
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2
3
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
•
If you are a Mac, Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
Select Install Now.
•
•
The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the
machine and interface in use.
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
14
Windows
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the installation
procedure, click Cancel to close the window.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
4
You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install
Window.
30
1. Introduction
Reinstalling the driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall
the driver.
15
Windows
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.
2
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
3
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver
4
31
1. Introduction
2. Menu Overview and
Basic Setup
This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options.
Menu overview
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions.
•
•
•
•
An checked (√) appears next to the currently selected menu.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting Menus" on page 222).
1
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series
Accessing the menu
Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel depending on the feature to be used.
1
Select
(Menu) until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK.
2
3
4
5
6
Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK.
If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to the ready mode.
33
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
a
Copy Feature
Fax Feature
Fax Setup
Darkness
Multi Send
Sending
Redial Times
Original Size
Photo
Magazine
Layout
Normal
2-Up
Small
DRPD Mode
h
Original
Light+5- Light+1 Delay Send
Reduce/Enlarge
Ring to Answer
Hole Punch
f
Normal
Send Forward
Forward to Fax
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Stamp RCV
Name
Duplex
Book
Dark+1- Dark+5
1 Sided
i
Center
Rcv Start Code
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
c
Original Type
Forward to Email
Forward to
1->2Sided
Border
Erase
Text
Fax
Confirmation
4-Up
1->2Sided Rotated
Text/Photo
Photo
ID Copy
BookCopy
Adjust Bkgd.
Off
Server
2->1Sided
Stamp
Image TCR
Receive Forward
DRPD Mode
2->2Sided
d
Item
Dial Mode
Resolution
Forward to Fax
Forward to PC
2->1Sided Rotated
Duplex Print
Opacity
Toll Save
Standard
Fine
Auto Color
Darkness
Light+5- Light+1
Change Default
j
Receiving
Auto
Position
Forward to Email
Forward to
Resolution
Darkness
Receive Mode
Fax
Super Fine
Original Size
Enhance Lev.1
WaterMark
Enhance Lev.2
Server
Normal
Message
Original Type
Original Size
Tel
b
Erase Lev.1- Erase
Lev.4
k
Forward & Print
Duplex
Dark+1- Dark+5
Pages
Ans/Fax
Secure Receive
1 Sided
2 Sided
Original Type
Duplex
g
Edge Erase
Off
Off
On
Text
2 Sided Rotated
Text/Photo
Print
Cancel Job
a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only.
b. CLX-626xFR Series only.
c. CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only.
d. This option may not be available depending on your country.
34
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
e. CLX-419xFN Series only.
f. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
g. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only.
h. This option does not appear when the 2-Up, 4-Up, Book copy, Duplex, Auto Fit option is on or the original document is loaded in ADF (DADF).
i. This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy.
j. This option appears only when the Item option is On.
k. This option does not appear when the Message option is Off.
35
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
Copy Setup
Scan Feature
Darkness
Scan Setup
Change Default
Print Setup
Trapping
Change Default
Original Size
Copies
Original
Type
USB Feature
Original Size
Orientation
Portrait
c
USB Default
Off
FTP Feature
Text
Original Type
Resolution
Color Mode
Color
Email Default
Landscape
Medium
Maximum
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Text/
Photo
Copy Collation
Reduce/Enlarge
Copies
FTP/SMB Default
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Resolution
Normal
Best
Screen
Photo
a
Normal
Duplex
Color Mode
File Format
Magazine
Gray
Enhanced
Detailed
1 Sided
Mono
Clear Text
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
Off
1->2Sided
Color Mode
Duplex
File Format
Emulation
1->2Sided Rotated
2->1Sided
File Format
Darkness
b
Emulation Type
Setup
Duplex
Duplex
SMB Feature
2->2Sided
Darkness
Darkness
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
2->1Sided Rotated
Auto Color
Email Feature
Server Confirmation
Edge Enhance
Off
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Darkness
Color Mode
File Format
Normal
Maximum
Light+5- Light+1
Normal
Color Mode
File Format
Duplex
Dark+1- Dark+5
Darkness
Duplex
a. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
b. CLX-626xFR Series only.
c. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only.
36
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
System Setup
Machine Setup
Machine ID
Auto CR
Auto Power Off
Usage Counter
Account
Sound
Job Manage.
b
Off
On
Auto Tray Switch
Key Sound
Alarm Sound
Fax Sound
Active Job
Secured Job
Stored Job
Maintenance
a
Paper Substitution
Fax Number
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Language
e
Paper Setup
CLR Empty Msg.
Supplies Life
Image Mgr.
Tray Protection
Paper Size
Tray 1
Report
Skip Blank Pages
PDF Type
Configuration
Supplies Info.
Demo Page
Address Book
Fax Send
c
Tray 2
Custom Color
Default Mode
Power Save
Stamp
Auto Color Reg.
Tone Adjustment
Default
MP Tray
Import Setting
Export Setting
Eco Settings
Vapor Mode
Off
d
Wakeup Event
System Timeout
Job Timeout
Manual Feeder
Change Default
Paper Type
Paper Source
Margin
Confirmation
Auto Tone Adj.
Standard tone
Cal. ID Sensor
TonerLow Alert
Serial Number
Fax Sent
Altitude
Adjustment
E-mail Sent
On
Humidity
Auto Continue
0 Sec
Fax Received
Auto
Tray Confirm
Fax Scheduled
Jobs
Ram Disk
30 Sec
Network
Paper Stacking
Configuration
Off
PCL Font List
PS Font List
a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only.
b. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only.
c. This is an optional feature.CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only.
d. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series only.
37
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
e. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
f. This option is available when the optional mass storage device, optional memory or Ram disk is installed.
Network
TCP/IP (IPv4)
DHCP
Network Configuration
Net. Activate
Http Activate
WINS
BOOTP
Static
TCP/IP (IPv6)
SNMP V1/V2
SNTP
IPv6 Activate
DHCPv6 Config
Ethernet Speed
UPnP(SSDP)
MDNS
Automatic
SetIP
10Mbps Half
10Mbps Full
100Mbps Half
100Mbps Full
1Gbps Full
SLP
802.1x
Clear Settings
38
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
2
Introducing the Home Screen
CLX-419xFW/ CLX-626xFW Series
You can set menus easily using the touch screen.
•
•
•
The Main screen is shown on the touch screen on the control panel.
Some menus are grayed out depending on your options or models.
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
•
•
(Copy): When you press Copy from the display screen, the Copy
screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options.
(Scan): When you press Scan from the display screen, the Scan screen
appears which has several tabs and lots of Scanning options.
•
(Fax): When you press Fax from the display screen, the Fax screen
appears which has several tabs and lots of Faxing options.
•
•
(Setup): You can browse current machine settings or change machine
values.
(Job Status): Job status shows the jobs currently running, completed
job or in queue.
39
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
•
(Eco): You can view the eco settings.
•
(Direct USB): Enters the USB menu when USB memory is inserted into
the USB memory port on your machine.
•
•
(Document Box): You can store the printing data, print the secure page
or shared folder.
: Shows the toner status.
•
•
: Selects the LCD brightness and language.
: Scroll through available options.
40
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
Copy
Fax
Delayed Send
Darkness
Basic Copy
Darkness
Auto
Border Erase
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
Memory Send
Darkness
Group Dial Send
Darkness
Tray1
Stamp
b
Original Type
Text
Resolution
Resolution
Resolution
Tray2
Item
N-up Copy
Opacity
Position
Duplex
Duplex
Duplex
MP Tray
Text/Photo
Photo
Duplex
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
On Hook Dial
Darkness
Original Type
Original Size
SpeedDial Send
Darkness
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
Redial
c
Manual Feeder
Layout
Darkness
Watermark
Magazine
Color Mode
Auto
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
N-up
ID Copy
Off
Darkness
Color Mode
Color
Collation
2-up
Resolution
Darkness
Color
Resolution
Resolution
Duplex
4-up
Mono
Book Copy
Mono
Duplex
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
Duplex
ID Copy
Custom Copy
Darkness
Auto Fit Copy
Darkness
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
Original Type
Original Size
Color Mode
Book Copy
Adjust Background
a
Duplex
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
Book Copy
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Type
Color Mode
Collate Copy
Edge Erase
Off
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
Tray
SmallOriginal
Hole Punch
Duplex
Darkness
d
Book Center
a. CLX-626xFW Series only.
b. This is an optional feature. CLX-626xFW Series only.
c. CLX-419xFW Series only.
d. This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy.
41
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
Scan
Duplex
Eco
Local PC
Destination
Send Email
To
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
PDF
Eco-On
On
Shared Folder
Darkness
File Name
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Name
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
Original Type
Off
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
Settings
FTP
Default Mode
Destination
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
ab
On
Off
PDF Encryption
File Format
Encryption
Duplex
PDF Encryption
Duplex
c
Duplex
PDF Encryption
On-Forced
Original Size
Original Type
Darkness
Darkness
File Name
Color Mode
File Format
Feature Configuration
Default
Duplex
Darkness
Darkness
File Policy
USB
Custom
Network PC
File Name
PDF Encryption
Duplex
WSD
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Name
File Format
PDF
Destination
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
SMB
Darkness
Destination
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
File Name
Custom Email
To
PDF Encryption
Subject
From
Color Mode
File Format
Duplex
Original Size
Original Type
Darkness
Encryption
CC
PDF Encryption
Duplex
BCC
Darkness
File Policy
42
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
a. CLX-626xFW Series only.
b. This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type.
c. If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings
> Eco), the On force message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode status.
43
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
Direct USB
Setup
Print From
Auto Fit
Copies
Machine Setup
Default Setting
Email
Account
WINS
Connect via
PIN
Print
Fax Setup
SNMP V1/V2
SNTP
WLAN Settings
WLAN Defaults
WLAN Signal
Clear Settings
Print Setup
Orientation
Copies
Copy Default
Scan Default
Fax Default
Paper Setup
Tray1
Reset
Send Forward
Receive Forward
Toll Save
a
Reports
UPnP(SSDP)
MDNS
Duplex
Configuration
Supplies Information
Demo Page
Select Tray
Color Mode
Scan to USB
Secure Receive
Prefix Dial
SetIP
SLP
c
Help List
Stmp Rcvd Name
ECM Mode
Wireless
Wi-Fi ON/OFF
Wi-Fi Direct
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color Mode
File Name
File Format
PDF
Tray2
Address Book
Fax Send Confirmation
Fax Sent
MP Tray
Resolution
Clear Text
Modem Speed
Image TCR
d
Manual Feeder
Margin
Wi-Fi Direct On/
Off
Edge Enhance
Trapping
Email Sent
Setup Wizard
Network Setup
Ethernet Speed
TCP/IP (IPv4)
TCP/IP (IPv6)
802.1x
Tray Behaviour
Device Name
IP Address
Group Owner
Network Key
Status
Fax Received
Fax Schedule Jobs
Network Configuration
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Usage Counter
Auto Tray Switch
Auto Continue
Screen
Emulation
b
Encryption
Paper Substitution
Select Tray
Duplex
Tray Protection
Darkness
File Policy
Address Book
PhoneBook
WPS Settings
Connect via PBC
Ethernet Activate
Http Activate
File Manage
Show Space
a. CLX-626xFW Series only.
b. This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type.
44
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
c. This is an optional feature.CLX-626xFW Series only.
d. CLX-419xFW Series only.
Setup
Document Box
System Boxes
Initial Setup
Machine ID
Toner Status Alert
Skip Blank Pages
Job Timeout
Admin Setup
User Access Control
Stored Print
Select Country
Language
Authentication
Secured Print
b
Altitude Adjustment
Auto CR
Shared Folder
Stamp
Date&Time
Duplex
Item
Clock Mode
Firmware Version
PDF Type
Select Tray
Copies
Opacity
Default Mode
Sound/Volume
Power Save
Position
ImageOverwrite
Default Paper Size
Color Mode
Chang Admin. Password
Firmware Upgrade
Troubleshooting
Language
a
Wakeup Event
System Timeout
Import Setting
Export Setting
CLR Empty Msg
Image Management
Vapor Mode
Paper Stacking
Humidity
a. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
b. CLX-626xFW Series only.
45
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Machine’s basic settings
Select
panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control
1
2
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Initial Setup on the touch
screen.
•
For Windows and Mac users, see "Device Settings" on page 321.
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,
-
Select the option you want, then press OK.
•
Language: change the language that is displayed on the control
panel.
•
Date & Time: When you set the time and date, they are used in delay
fax and delay print. They are printed on reports. If, however, they are
not correct, you need to change it for the correct time being.
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings.
To change the machine’s default settings, follow these steps:
Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad (see
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some
models.
•
•
•
•
•
Month = 01 to 12
Day = 01 to 31
Year = requires four digits
Hour = 01 to 12
Minute = 00 to 59
•
•
Clock Mode: You can set your machine to display the current time
using either a 12-hour or 24-hour format.
Power Save: When you are not using the machine for a while, use
this feature to save power.
46
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Machine’s basic settings
When you press the
( Power/Wakeup) button, start printing, or a fax is
received, the product will wake up from the power saving mode.
•
Altitude Adjustment: Print quality is affected by atmospheric
pressure, which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of
the machine above sea level. Before you set the altitude value,
determine the altitude where you are (see "Altitude adjustment" on
Select the option you want, then press OK.
3
4
5
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
mode.
Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine.
•
•
•
•
47
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
3
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your
machine.
Tray overview
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.
•
•
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreements.
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
cause damage to the machine.
•
•
Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.
2
1
2
1
Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page
•
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
cause damage to the machine.
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may
lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.
4
3
3
1
2
3
4
Tray extend lever
Paper length guide
Paper width guide
Paper width guides on a manual feeder
48
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
4
For Legal-sized paper
Loading paper in the tray
Push button as shown and pull out the tray.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
1
Tray 1 / optional tray
2
Pull out the paper tray.
1
LGL
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Tray overview" on
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,
or jamming of the paper.
49
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Squeeze and the paper width guide and paper length lever to locate
them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of the tray to
After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and
paper length guide.
2
4
2
2
1
1
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading papers.
3
1
2
Paper length guide
Paper width guide
50
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Insert the tray back into the machine.
5
6
•
•
Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.
If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.
•
Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or
the paper can be wrinkled.
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for tray (see
The settings set from the machine driver override the settings on the control
panel.
a To print from an application, open an application and start the print
menu.
c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate
paper type.
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label.
d Select Auto Select in paper source, then press OK.
e Start printing in application.
51
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Pull out the paper tray for manual feeding.
Multi-purpose (or Manual feeder) tray
1
OR
The multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray can hold special sizes and types of
print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media
Press the push-release of multi-purpose tray and it down to open.
Tips on using the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray
•
Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
•
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still
paper in the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray. This also applies to other
types of print media.
•
•
Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them
into the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
52
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Load the paper.
Squeeze the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray paper width guides
and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much,
or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew.
2
3
1
2
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
•
•
When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline
When papers overlap when printing using Multi-purpose tray, open tray
1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing again.
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
4
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
53
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
•
•
When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time
The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the
control panel.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see
a To print in application, open an application and start the print menu.
c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate
paper type.
To see for paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media specifications" on
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label.
d Select Manual Feeder (or MP Tray) in paper source, then press OK.
e Start printing in application.
If your machine has multi-purpose tray, press OK on the control panel
each time you load a sheet of paper.
Manual feeder/ Multi-
a
Types
Plain
Tray 1
Optional tray
purpose tray
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
5
Thick
Printing on special media
Thicker
Thin
●
●
The table below shows the special media usable in tray.
Bond
The media is also shown in the Printing Preferences. To get the highest
printing quality, select the proper media type from the Printing preferences
Color
CardStock
Labels
●
For example, if you want to print on labels, select Labels for Paper Type.
Transparency
Envelope
Preprinted
54
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure.
Manual feeder/ Multi-
purpose tray
a
Types
Tray 1
Optional tray
Cotton
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Recycled
Archive
●
●
●
●
●
Letterhead
Punched
Glossy Photo
a. CLX-626xND /CLX-626xFD /CLX-626xFR /CLX-626xFW Series only.
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
(●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)
•
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
2
-
-
Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m otherwise; jams may occur.
Envelope
Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not
contain air.
Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
-
-
Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine
during operation.
•
•
•
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds.
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
•
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
55
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
•
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the
corner of the envelope.
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in
laser printers.
1
2
Acceptable
Unacceptable
•
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second about 170°C (338 °F). The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
•
•
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the
edges of the envelope.
•
•
•
Must withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long. Dust and dirt
may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
Transparency
•
•
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged
sunlight.
In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be
lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead
projector.
•
•
•
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.
Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed
sheets stack up as they are being printed out.
56
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
•
Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox, such
as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780 (Letter).
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
•
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine
components.
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
printers.
•
•
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,
bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
•
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature
about 170°C (338°F).
-
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
•
In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)
away from the edges of the material.
-
Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
57
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Preprinted paper
Glossy Photo
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
•
Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP
Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only.
•
Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP
Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A).
6
Setting the paper size and type
AAAAA
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the
control panel buttons.
•
•
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy
Printer Manager program.
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
-
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,
•
Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
•
•
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely
affect machine rollers.
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing
print quality.
58
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
7
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or
1
Paper Type on the control panel.
Using the output support
Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Paper Setup > select a tray >
Paper Size or Paper Type on the touch screen.
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number
of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not
allow children near it.
Select the tray and the option you want.
2
3
4
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help
the printed pages to align. Unfold the output support.
mode.
•
The settings set from the machine driver override the settings on the
control panel.
a To print from an application, open an application and start the print
menu.
c Press the Paper tab and select an appropriate paper.
•
If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the
Paper tab > Size > Edit... and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
59
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
8
9
Preparing originals
Loading originals
•
•
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for
copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper
jam, low print quality and machine damage.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
-
-
-
-
-
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
Coated paper
Onion skin or thin paper
Wrinkled or creased paper
Curled or rolled paper
Torn paper
On the scanner glass
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best
scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. Make sure that no
originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document
feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
•
•
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
•
•
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other
unusual characteristics.
60
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Lift and open the scanner lid.
Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
1
2
61
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Close the scanner lid.
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
3
1
2
•
•
•
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and
toner consumption.
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always
keep it clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner
lid open.
Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure
that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on
the document input tray.
•
•
Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall
on your hands and get hurt.
•
Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.
In the document feeder
Using the document feeder (or dual automatic document feeder (DADF), you
2
can load up to 50 sheets of paper (80 g/m , 21 lbs bond) for one job.
62
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Media and tray
Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.
3
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout.
63
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
3
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using
10
Printing
If you are a Mac, Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.
Open the document you want to print.
1
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
4
5
Select Print from the File menu.
2
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
64
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
11
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
) in the Windows task bar.
(
•
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
button on the control panel.
(Stop or Stop/Clear)
65
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
12
The screenshot may differ depending on model.
Opening printing preferences
•
•
The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may
differ depending on the machine in use.
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a
warning mark
option but it is not recommended, and an
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
or . An
mark means you can select that certain
mark means you cannot
Open the document you want to print.
1
2
3
4
Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
Select your machine from the Select Printer.
Click Properties or Preferences.
•
•
You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status
button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 322).
66
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
Using a favorite setting
To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set
to print according to the settings you have selected.
The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use.
To delete saved settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete.
To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:
13
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
1
Using help
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
2
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and
press F1 on your keyboard.
Click Save.
3
Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon.
4
Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.
5
67
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
14
Select
the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings on
1
2
Eco printing
Or press Eco on the control panel.
Or select Eco > Settings > Next on the touch screen.
The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco function
allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing.
Select the option you want and press OK.
If you press the Eco button from the control panel, eco mode is enabled. The
default setting of Eco mode is duplex (CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR/
CLX-626xFW Series only), Multiple Pages per Side (2-up), Skip Blank Pages.
•
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the eco mode.
-
-
Off: Set the eco mode off.
On: Set the eco mode on.
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy
Printer Manager program.
If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web
Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or
Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the On force
message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode
status.
•
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see
•
Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru™ Web Service
or Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Before you select this item, you
must set the eco function in SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco).
Setting Eco mode on the control panel
•
•
•
The settings set from the machine’s driver override the settings on the
control panel.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
-
Select Template
▪
▪
Default Eco: The machine is set to Default Eco mode.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
Custom Eco: Change any necessary values.
some models.
68
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
Press OK to save the selection.
3
Password button: You can set from SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy Printer
Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the password button is activated. To
change the print settings, click on this button, enter the password or need
to contact the administrator.
Setting eco mode on the driver
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
Result simulator
Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used
electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you
selected.
Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image (
means the eco mode is currently enabled.
), that
•
The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled.
Eco options
•
Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA,
the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and
www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index.
•
•
•
Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel.
None: Disables Eco mode.
Eco Printing: Enables eco mode. Activate the various Eco items you want to
use.
•
•
The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing
power consumption of this machine.
•
Password: If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode, you have to
enter the password to change the status.
The actual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may
differ depending on the operating system used, computing performance,
application software, connection method, media type [thickness], media
size, job complexity, etc.
69
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic printing
15
Printing secure documents from the control panel
Secure printing
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
When you use a printing device in an office, school or other public place, you can
protect your personal documents or confidential information by using the
secure printing feature.
Select
control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Job Manage > Secured Job on the
1
Starting secure printing on the driver
Or select DocumentBox > System Boxes > Next > Secured Print on the
touch screen.
job name, user ID, and password. Even though you have started the secure
printing job, the device will not print the document until you enter your
password on the printer.
Select the document to print.
2
3
4
Enter the password that you set from the printer driver.
Print or delete the document.
•
•
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only.
You can use this feature after installing the optional memory.
If you did not install optional memory, you can set the menus as shown
below:
-
From a computer, select a printer from the printer list > right-click the
printer > select Properties > Device Options > Properties > Storage
70
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
•
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press
(Stop
or Stop/Clear) button and the copying will stop.
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
17
16
Changing the settings for each copy
Basic copy
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and
easily make a copy.
Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
(settings) on the touch screen.
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
1
Or select
•
If you press the
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button twice while setting the
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
copy options, all of the options you have set for the current copy job will
be canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will
automatically return to their default status after the machine completes
the copy in progress.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
3
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge,
Darkness, Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if
necessary.
4
5
Darkness
Press
(Start).
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust
the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
71
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
Select
control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the
Select
control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the
1
1
2
Or press Darkness on the control panel.
Or select
panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the control
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
(settings) >Darkness on the touch
screen.
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
(settings) > Original Type on the
touch screen.
Select the option you want and press OK.
2
3
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the
darkest.
Select the option you want and press OK.
•
•
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts.
Original Type
•
•
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document for the current copy job.
Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
3
Reduced or enlarged copy
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% from the
document feeder or scanner glass.
72
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge >
1
•
If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not
available.
Custom on the control panel.
Or select
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge> Custom on
the control panel.
To select from the predefined copy sizes
Or select Copy > Custom Copy >
(settings) > Reduce/Enlarge >
Custom on the touch screen.
Select
the control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on
1
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad.
2
3
4
Or select
panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on the control
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Or select Copy > Custom Copy >
(settings) > Reduce/Enlarge on
mode.
the touch screen.
Select the option you want and press OK.
2
3
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
mode.
18
ID card copying
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
73
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display.
Press (Start).
3
4
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side
and Press [Start].
•
•
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available.
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
5
Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
Press ID Copy on the control panel.
1
Or select
panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Layout > ID Copy on the control
Or select Copy > ID Copy on the touch screen.
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
2
Press
(Start) button.
6
74
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic copying
•
If you do not press the
copied.
(Start) button, only the front side will be
•
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be
printed.
75
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic scanning
For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection, or select
Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.
19
Basic Scanning
Select the scan destination you want and press OK.
3
Default setting is My Documents.
This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals.
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.
•
•
You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list. Also
you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different
path.
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model.
To change the Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
Switch to
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.
•
If you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see
Select the option you want and press OK.
4
5
Scanning begins.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
2
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
Select
(scan) > Scan To PC on the control panel.
Or select Scan > Local PC on the touch screen.
76
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
20
•
•
•
This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/CLX-626xND Series (see
Preparing to fax
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to
your telephone wall jack (see "Rear view" on page 23). Refer to the Quick
Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a
telephone connection is different from one country to another.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
21
•
•
You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more
information ask your internet service provider.
Sending a fax
We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public
Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use
a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can
improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter
eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or
Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the
machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro-
filter.
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or
the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document feeder
and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the document
feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
Select
(fax) on the control panel.
2
3
1
2
3
Line port
Micro filter
DSL modem / Telephone line
Or select Fax > Memory Send >
(settings) on the touch screen.
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
77
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
Enter the destination fax number (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
4
3
Press
(Start) on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and
Press
(On Hook Dial) on the control panel or lift the handset.
5
4
5
6
send the fax to the destinations.
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
•
If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung
Network PC Fax (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page 293).
Press
(Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax
signal from the remote fax machine.
•
•
When you want to cancel a fax job, press
button before the machine starts transmission.
(Stop or Stop/Clear)
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to
place another page.
You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple
locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote
station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory.
Sending a fax manually
You cannot send faxes with this feature if you chosen super fine as an option
or if the fax is in color.
Perform the following to send a fax using
panel.
(On Hook Dial) on the control
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
1
2
Select
(fax) on the control panel.
Select
(fax) on the control panel.
(settings) on the touch screen.
2
Or select Fax > SpeedDial Send or Group Dial Send >
(settings) on
Or select Fax > On Hook Dial >
the touch screen.
78
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
22
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
3
Receiving a fax
Select
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control panel.
4
5
Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the
machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically
receives the fax.
Or select Next on the touch screen.
Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using
23
the
(Address book) button.
Adjusting the document settings
Enter the second fax number and press OK.
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your original’s
status to get the best quality.
6
7
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
steps 5 and 6.
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
•
•
You can add up to 10 destinations.
some models.
Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial number.
Resolution
When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another
8
No.? prompt and press OK.
The default document settings produce good results when using typical text-
based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality
fax.
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the
order in which you entered them.
Multi send report is printed after sending faxes.
79
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Basic faxing
•
Color Fax: Original with colors.
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
default setting (see Advanced Guide).
•
•
Memory transmission is not available in this mode.
You can only send a color fax if the machine you are communicating with
supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually.
Select
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the control
1
2
Or select Fax > select a fax such as Memory Send, On Hook Dial,
Delayed Send, or etc. > (settings) > Resolution on the touch screen.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
3
Select the option you want and press OK.
Darkness
•
•
Standard: Originals with normal sized characters.
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
•
Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are
communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default
setting (see "Fax" on page 231).
Select
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the control
1
•
•
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.
Or select Fax > select a fax such as Memory Send, On Hook Dial,
Delayed Send, or etc. > (settings) > Darkness on the touch screen.
When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine
with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine
resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode
supported by the other fax machine.
Select a darkness level you want.
2
3
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
•
Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.
80
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector.
24
A
B
About USB memory
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give
you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and
videos, high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or
move.
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.
You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device.
•
•
•
•
•
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device
Print data stored on a USB memory device
Restore backup files to the machine’s memory
Format the USB memory device
Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.
•
•
Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation
or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does
not cover damage caused by user’s misuse.
Check the available memory space
If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings
and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it.
For details about these features, see the user’s guide of the USB memory
device.
25
Plugging in a USB memory device
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1.1 and
USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory devices with
FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
81
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
26
Scanning
Scanning to a USB memory device
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
1
2
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Select
(scan) > Scan To USB > OK on the control panel.
3
Or select Scan > USB > Next > Start on the touch screen.
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory
device.
The machine begins scanning.
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from the
machine.
Customizing Scan to USB
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to USB
job.
82
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
Select
control panel.
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the
Select the desired status you want and press OK.
1
3
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options.
Or select Scan to >
control panel.
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
mode.
Or select Direct USB > Scan to USB >
(settings) on the touch screen.
You can change the default scan settings. Refer to the Advanced Guide.
Select the setting option you want appears.
2
27
•
•
•
•
Original Size: Sets the image size.
Printing from a USB memory device
Original Type: Sets the original document’s.
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.
File s supported by Direct Print option.
Color Mode: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,
you cannot select JPEG in File Format.
•
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible.
•
File Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.
If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in Color
Mode.
If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be
different.
•
•
•
•
Duplex: Sets the duplex mode.
Darkness: Sets the brightness level to scan an original.
File Name: Sets the file name.
•
•
•
•
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
JPEG: JPEG Baseline
PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version.
XPS
File Policy: Sets the policy to save files between overwirting or
renaming
•
PDF Encryption: Sets the encrypts PDF files.
83
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
28
To print a document from a USB memory device
Backing up data
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
1
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure
or storage failure. Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them
as backup files on a USB memory device.
Select USB Print.
2
Select the folder or file you want and press OK.
3
Backing up data
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more
files or folders in the selected folder.
Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
1
Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number.
4
Press OK, Start or Print to start printing the selected file.
Select
on the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Export Setting
5
2
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Export
Setting on the touch screen.
Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2.
6
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.
Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK.
3
4
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
The data is backed up to the USB memory.
7
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
mode.
84
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
Restoring data
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files
or folders in the selected folder.
Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to
1
the USB memory port.
Select
on the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Import Setting
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot be
restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data before
deleting it.
2
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Import
Setting on the touch screen.
Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK.
3
4
5
6
Deleting an image file
Select the file you want to restore and press OK.
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a
Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.
file >
(settings) > Delete on the touch screen.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
mode.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
1
29
Managing USB memory
Select File Manage > Delete and press OK.
Select the file you want to delete and press OK.
Select Yes.
2
3
4
5
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at
once by reformatting the device.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
mode.
85
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Using USB memory device
Formatting a USB memory device
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
1
Select Check Space.
2
3
4
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a
file >
(settings) > Format on the touch screen.
The available memory space appears on the display.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
mode.
1
Select File Manage > Format and press OK.
2
3
4
Select Yes.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
mode.
Viewing the USB memory status
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving
documents.
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > Show Space > Next on the
touch screen.
86
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
3. Maintenance
This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your
machine.
Ordering supplies and accessories
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.
88
3. Maintenance
Available consumables
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the followings of supplies for your machine:
a
Type
Toner
Model
Part name
Average yield
•
•
•
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
•
•
Average continuous black cartridge yield: Apporx. 2,500 standard pages (Black)
•
•
•
•
CLT-K504S: Black
CLT-Y504S: Yellow
CLT-M504S: Magenta
CLT-C504S: Cyan
cartridge
Average continuous color cartridge yield: Apporx. 1,800 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
•
•
•
•
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-626xFW Series
•
•
Average continuous black cartridge yield: Apporx. 2,000 standard pages (Black)
•
•
•
•
CLT-K506S: Black
CLT-Y506S: Yellow
CLT-M506S: Magenta
CLT-C506S: Cyan
Average continuous color cartridge yield: Apporx. 1,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
•
•
Average continuous black cartridge yield: Apporx. 6,000 standard pages (Black)
•
•
•
•
CLT-K506L: Black
CLT-Y506L: Yellow
CLT-M506L: Magenta
CLT-C506L: Cyan
Average continuous color cartridge yield: Apporx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
Waste toner
container
•
•
•
CLX-419xN Series
CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
•
•
Apporx. 14,000 standard pages (Black)
CLT-W504
Apporx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)
•
•
•
•
CLX-626xND Series
CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-626xFW Series
CLT-W506
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size.
89
3. Maintenance
Available consumables
Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used,
the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be
purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise,
new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your
machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other
supplies according to the specific country conditions.
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot
guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair
required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not
be covered under the machine’s warranty.
90
3. Maintenance
Available accessories
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.
•
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 5).
Accessory
Function
Part name
Memory module
Extends your machine’s memory capacity.
•
•
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: ML-MEM370 (512 MB)
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: ML-MEM380 (1,024 MB)
Optional tray
If you are experiencing frequent paper supply
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: CLP-S680A
a
problems, you can attach an additional 520 sheet tray.
IEEE 1284B parallel Allows you to use various interface.
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: ML-PAR100
b
Connector
•
When installing the printer driver with an
IEEE1284B parallel connector, the machine
might not be found and after installing the
printer driver, only basic printing features
are available.
•
•
If you want to check the machine's status or
set the settings, connect the machine to a
computer with a USB cable or a network.
If you use the IEEE 1284B parallel connector,
you can not use the USB cable.
a. Plain paper 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond).
b. The optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector can be used by plugging in both the USB port and the 5V output port.
91
3. Maintenance
Available maintenance parts
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service
provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its
“Average yield”.
Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The purpose of which
is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met.
a
Average yield
Parts
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series
Approx. 100,000 pages
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
Approx. 100,000 pages
Transfer Roller
Fuser Unit
Approx. 50,000 pages
Approx. 100,000 pages
Pick-Up Roller
Approx. 200,000 pages
Approx. 300,000 pages
Retard Roller
Approx. 100,000 pages
Approx. 100,000 pages
Intermediate Transfer unit (ITB)
Approx. 100,000 pages
Approx. 100,000 pages
a. It will be affected by the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media, media size and job complexity.
92
3. Maintenance
Storing the toner cartridge
1
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature
and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to
ensure optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new
Samsung toner cartridge.
Handling instructions
•
•
•
Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge.
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used.
This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner
cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation
– if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge
with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can
cause internal damage and toner spillage.
2
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf
and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed
from the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge
properly.
Toner cartridge usage
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung
brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or
remanufactured toner cartridges.
•
•
Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package.
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it
were installed in the machine.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused
by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner
cartridges.
•
Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%.
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
Direct sunlight or room light.
Dusty places.
A car for a long period of time.
An environment where corrosive gases are present.
An environment with salty air.
93
3. Maintenance
Storing the toner cartridge
3
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary
depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or
media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the
toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
94
3. Maintenance
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
•
•
•
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density variation side to side.
The Status LED blinks red. The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display.
The computers’s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is low on toner (see "Using Samsung
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still
occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
•
•
•
•
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
95
3. Maintenance
Redistributing toner
96
3. Maintenance
Replacing the toner cartridge
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).
•
•
The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicate when each individual toner cartridges should be replaced.
The computers’s Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is empty on toner (see "Using Samsung
Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 89).
•
•
Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
•
•
•
•
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
97
3. Maintenance
Replacing the toner cartridge
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-419xFW Series
5~6
98
3. Maintenance
Replacing the toner cartridge
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series
99
3. Maintenance
Replacing the waste toner container
When the life span of the waste toner container has expired, waste toner container-related message appears on the screen display of the control panel, indicating
the waste toner container needs to be replaced. Check the waste toner container for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 89).
•
Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality problems
occur.
•
•
When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands.
Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill.
Do not tilt or turn over the container.
100
3. Maintenance
Replacing the waste toner container
2
1
1
2
2
1
101
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
4
5
Precautions
Setting Device Options
•
Disconnect the power cord
When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
in Device Options.
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power
cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.
•
Discharge static electricity
Click the Windows Start menu.
1
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
2
•
•
•
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service
component. Do not change it by yourself. There is a risk of an explosion if
battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to
the instructions.
Right-click your machine.
3
4
For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select
the Printer properties.
102
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
•
Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account
identification information with each document you print.
If Printer properties item has ▶ mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with selected printer.
-
-
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user
permission can start a print job.
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with
group permission can start a print job.
Select Device Options.
5
The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating
system you are using.
If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting
Password Encryption.
Select the appropriate option.
•
Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size.
6
Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window.
7
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
•
Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select
the tray.
Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this
feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode.
•
•
Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job.
Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF
Spooling.
103
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
6
Upgrading a memory module
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory module slot to install additional memory. We recommend the use of only genuine
Samsung DIMM's. You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM's.
The order information is provided for optional accessories (see "Available accessories" on page 91).
After installing the optional memory, you can use the advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer
properties window. You can controll the active job queue and file policy in Job Manage. menu (see "Using optional device features" on page 303).
1
2
2
1
104
3. Maintenance
Installing accessories
2
2
1
1
105
3. Maintenance
Monitoring the supplies life
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if
necessary.
•
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 33).
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel.
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Report > Supplies Information on the touch screen.
Select the option you want and press OK.
2
3
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready mode.
106
3. Maintenance
Setting the toner low alert
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether or not
this message or LED appears.
•
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 33).
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
-
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > TonerLow Alert on the control panel.
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Toner Status Alert on the touch screen.
On the touch screen model, you can set the toner's Warning Level for the toner low error in the Toner Status Alert option. Warning Level means the remaining
amount of toner (%) in the toner cartridge.
Select the option you want.
2
3
Press OK to save the selection.
107
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing
condition and use your machine longer.
•
•
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the
cabinet.
If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.
7
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.
108
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
8
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks
or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.
•
•
•
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such
as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine.
•
•
Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
•
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
109
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
110
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
9
Cleaning the pickup roller
•
•
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
111
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
10
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed.
•
•
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
Lift and open the scanner lid.
1
2
112
3. Maintenance
Cleaning the machine
Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry.
3
4
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
Scanner lid
Scanner glass
Document feeder glass
White bar
Close the scanner lid.
4
113
3. Maintenance
Tips for moving & storing your machine
•
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to
the machine or reduce print quality.
•
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.
114
3. Maintenance
4. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine
has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error.
If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting
chapter in the Advanced Guide (see "Troubleshooting" on page 328).
If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct media s, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 48).
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
Do not mix papers in a tray.
Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 146).
116
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing original document jams
When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning message appears on the display.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper- originals.
117
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing original document jams
1
Original paper jam in front of scanner
•
•
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 8).
118
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing original document jams
2
Original paper jam inside of scanner
•
•
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 8).
119
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing original document jams
3
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner
•
•
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 21).
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.
1
2
120
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing original document jams
4
Original paper jam in scanner duplex path
•
•
•
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 21).
2
1
121
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.
5
In tray1
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
122
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
124
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
126
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
3
2
127
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
8
Inside the machine
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
128
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
130
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
131
4. Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
132
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding the status LED
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.
•
•
•
•
Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 24).
To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part (see "Understanding display messages" on page 136).
You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’s Samsung Printing Status window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 322).
If the problem persists, call a service representative.
LED
Status
Off
Description
The machine is off-line.
When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data.
Blinking
Green
On
•
•
The machine is on-line and can be used.
A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem
is cleared, the machine resumes.
a
Blinking
•
Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for
replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page
Status
b
Red
•
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (see
•
•
•
•
The cover is opened. Close the cover.
On
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on page 136).
A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 122).
134
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding the status LED
LED
Status
Blinking
Description
The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
Blue
On
Off
On
The machine is connected to a wireless network (see "Wireless network setup" on page 192).
The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.
Wireless
The machine is in power save mode.
(
)
Blue
The machine is in ready mode or machine’s power is off.
Power/
Wakeup
Off
On
Off
Eco mode is off.
Eco
Green
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages
may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is
on and the printer stops printing.
b. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 24).
135
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
11
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status
or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.
Paper Jam-related messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’s
Printing Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
•
•
Original paper jam
inside of scanner.
Remove jam
document has
jammed in
page 117).
•
•
•
If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job
again. If the problem persists, call a service representative.
document feeder.
Original paper jam
in front of scanner.
Remove jam
When you call for service, provide the service representative with the
contents of display message.
Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the
options or models.
•
•
•
Paper Jam
in Tray1
Paper has jammed
in the tray.
Clear the jam (see "In tray1" on
page 122).
•
•
•
•
•
•
[error number] indicates the error number.
[tray type] indicates the tray number.
[media type] indicates the media type.
[media size] indicates the media size.
[color] indicates the color of toner.
[unit type] indicates the unit type.
Paper Jam
in Tray2
Paper has jammed
Clear the jam (see "In optional
Paper Jam
in MP Tray
Paper has jammed
Clear the jam (see "In the manual
tray.
page 125).
•
Jam inside machine Paper has jammed
Clear the jam (see "Inside the
in the inside
machine.
•
•
Jam inside of duplex Paper has jammed
Clear the jam (see "In the duplex
Jam in exit area
Paper has jammed
in the paper exit
area.
Clear the jam (see "In the exit
136
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
12
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Toner-related messages
•
Prepare new
[color] toner
Small amount of
toner is left in the
Prepare a new cartridge for a
replacement. You may temporarily
Prepare new
[color] toner
cartridge
indicatedcartridge. increase the printing quality by
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
The estimated
cartridge life of
toner is close.
redistributing the toner (see
•
Error [error
number]
A toner cartridge is Reinstall the toner cartridge.
not installed.
Toner Failure:
[error number]
[color]
Install [color]
toner again
•
Replace new
[color]toner
Replace with
new [color]
toner
Theindicatedtoner
cartridge has
almost reached its
estimated
•
•
You can choose Stop or Continue
as shown on the control panel. If
you select Stop, the printer stops
printing. If you select Continue,
the printer keeps printing but the
printing quality cannot be
A toner cartridge is Reinstall the toner cartridge two or
not being detected three times to confirm it is seated
properly. If the problem persists,
contact the service representatives.
a
cartridge life .
•
•
[color] toner
not installed
Install [color]
toner
cartridge
Not remove
protective film
from toner.
Remove the protective film from the
toner cartridge. Refer to Quick
Installation Guide provided with your
machine.
cartridge
guaranteed.
Replace the toner cartridge for the
best print quality when this
message appears. Using a
cartridge beyond this stage can
result in printing quality issues (see
[color]toner
Not
compatible
[color] toner
cartridge is
not
Theindicatedtoner Install the corresponding toner
cartridge is not
suitable for your
machine.
cartridge with a Samsung-genuine
Theindicatedtoner Replace the toner cartridge (see
cartridge has
reached its
estimated
compatible.
Check guide
cartridge life .
137
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates
the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798 (see "Available
consumables" on page 89). The number of pages may be affected by operating environment,
percentage of image area, printing interval, media, percentage of image area, and media size.
Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears
and the machine stops printing.
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
Paper jam or
empty in tray
•
•
Paper has jammed
in the paper feed
area.
•
•
Clear the jam (see
"CLX-419xN/CLX-
There is no paper in
tray.
).
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a
non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required
as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be
covered under the machine warranty.
Load paper in tray
•
•
•
Paper Empty in tray 1
Paper is empty in tray 1.
Load paper
There is no paper in
tray 1.
Load paper in tray 1 (see
13
Tray-related messages
Paper Empty in tray 2
Paper is empty in tray 2.
Load paper
There is no paper in
tray 2.
Load paper in tray 2 (see
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
Output bin full
Output bin full. Remove
printed paper
The output tray is full. Remove papers from
the output tray, the
Paper Empty in MP
Paper is empty in MP
tray.
There is no paper in
the multi-purpose
tray.
Load paper in the multi-
purpose (or Manual
feeder) tray" on page
printer resumes
printing.
Load paper
138
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
14
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Network-related messages
•
Door is open.
Close it
The front cover or rear
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
Message
IP Conflict
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
Scanner door open
Door of scanner is
open.
The document feeder
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
•
•
The network IP address
you have set is being
used by someone else.
Check the IP address
and reset it if
necessary (see
This IP address
conflicts with that of
other system
Close the door
Advanced Guide).
•
•
•
•
Error: [error number]
The machine unit cannot Reboot the power and
802.1x Network Error
802.1x Network Error
Contact the Admin.
Fail to authenticate.
Check the network
authentication
protocol. If the
problem persists,
contact your network
administrator.
be controlled.
try the printing job
again. If the problem
persists, please call for
service.
Actuator [unit type]
Failure: [error number]
Call for service
Error: [error number]
[unit type] Failure: [error
number] Turn off then
on
15
Error: [error number]
Misc. messages
[unit type] Unit Failure:
[error number] Turn off
then on
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
[unit type] Unit Failure:
[error number] Please
turn off then on
•
•
Adjusting Color
Registration
The machine is adjusting Wait a few minutes.
the color registration.
Calibrating
image density…
The machine is
calibrating the image
density.
Wait a few minutes.
139
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
Not Proper room temp The machine is in a room Move the machine to a
•
Waste toner Full
The life span of the waste Replace a waste toner
with improper room
temperature.
room with proper room
temperature (see
toner container has
expired and the printer
will stop printing until a
new waste toner
container with a
Samsung-genuine
waste toner container.
Not Proper room
temperature.
Change room
temperature
Waste toner container
is almost full.
Replace with new one
container is placed into
the printer.
•
•
Prepare TR. belt
Prepare new image
transfer belt unit
The life of the transfer
belt will expired soon.
Prepare the transfer
belt with a new one.
•
Waste Not Installed
Waste toner tank is not
installed. install it
The waste toner
Install the waste toner
container is not installed. container. If it is already
installed, try to reinstall
the waste toner
Replace TR. belt
Replace with new
image transfer belt uint
The life of the transfer
belt has expired.
Replace the transfer
belt with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
container. If the
problem persists, call
for service.
•
•
•
Replace Fuser uint
Replace with new fuser
uint
The life of the fuser unit
will be expired.
Replace the fuser unit
with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
•
•
Replace pickup roller
Replace with new [tray
type] pickup roller
The life of the tray1, tray2 Replace the tray pick-
or MP tray pick-up roller up roller with a new
will expired soon.
one. Contact the
service representatives.
Install TR. belt unit
Install image transfer
belt unit
The transfer belt is not
installed.
Install a Samsung-
genuine transfer belt.
Contact the service
representatives.
Replace retard roller
The life of the tray1 or
tray2 retard roller has
expired.
Replace the tray retard
roller with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
End of life, Replace with
new [tray type] retard
roller
TR Not compatible
Image transfer belt unit
is not compatible.
The transfer belt of the
machine is not for your
machine.
Install the a Samsung-
genuine part designed
for your machine.
Contact the service
representatives.
Check guide
140
4. Troubleshooting
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
•
Memory Full
Fax memory is almost
full.
Print or remove the
received fax data in the
memory.
The memory is full. No
more fax data can be
received.
Print or remove
received fax job
•
•
•
Memory Full
Fax memory is full.
Print or remove
received fax job
Scanner Locked
Scanner locking switch
is locked.
The scanner is locked.
Reboot the power. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Release it
Error: [error number]
There is a problem in the Install the fax card. If it
fax system.
is already installed, try
to reinstall the fax card.
If the problem persists,
call for service.
Fax System Failure:
[error number] Install
fax modem card again
•
•
Error: [error number]
There is a problem in the Unplug the power cord
UI system.
and plug it back in. If
the problem persists,
call for service.
UI System Failure:
[error number] Call for
service
Error: [error number]
There is a problem in the Unplug the power cord
engine system.
and plug it back in. If
the problem persists,
call for service.
EngineSystem Failure:
[error number] Call for
service
141
4. Troubleshooting
5. Appendix
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.
Specifications
1
General specifications
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.
Items
Description
Dimension
Weight
Width x Length x Height
•
•
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: 420 x 426 x 448 mm (16.54 x 16.77 x 17.64 inches)
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series: 420 x 452.5 x 476.8 mm (16.54 x 17.81 x 18.77 inches)
•
•
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: 469 x 452.5 x 504.3 mm (18.46 x 17.81 x 19.85 inches)
Machine with consumables
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: 21.44 Kg (47.27 Ibs)
•
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series: 24.8 Kg (54.68 Ibs)
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: 26.7 Kg (58.86 Ibs)
143
5. Appendix
Specifications
Items
Description
a
Ready mode
Print mode
Less than 32 dB (A)
Noise Level
•
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 50 dB (A)
•
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A)
Copy mode Scanner glass
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A)
•
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 54 dB (A)
Document feeder
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A)
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series: Less than 54 dB (A)
•
•
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 54 dB (A)
Scan mode Scanner glass
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A)
•
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 54 dB (A)
Document feeder
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A)
•
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series: Less than 54 dB (A)
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 54 dB (A)
Temperature
Humidity
Operation
15 to 30 °C (59 to 86 °F)
-20 to 50 °C (-4 to 122 °F)
Storage (packed)
Operation
20 to 80% RH
10 to 90% RH
Storage (packed)
b
110 volt models
220 volt models
AC 110 - 127 V
AC 220 - 240 V
Power rating
144
5. Appendix
Specifications
Items
Description
Power consumption Average operating mode
•
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 380 W
•
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 450 W
Ready mode
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 50 W
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR: Less than 16 W
•
•
CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 18 W
Power save mode
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN Series: Less than 1.0 W
•
•
•
CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 2.4 W
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR: Less than 1.0 W
CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 2.4 W
Power off mode
Less than 0.1 W
SPW-B4319U
c
Module
Wireless
a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
b. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.
145
5. Appendix
Specifications
2
Print media specifications
a
Weight/Capacity
CLX-419xN /CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
Type
Size
Dimensions
Tray1
Manual feeder
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
bc
2
2
2
2
Letter
Legal
US Folio
A4
Oficio
JIS B5
ISO B5
Executive
Statement
A5
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)
Plain paper
70 to 89 g/m (19 to
24 lbs bond)
70 to 89 g/m (19 to 70 to 90 g/m (19 to
24 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m (19 to
24 lbs bond)
24 lbs bond)
•
250 sheets of 80 g/
•
1 sheet
•
•
Tray1: 250 sheets of
•
50 sheets
2
2
m (21 lbs bond)
80 g/m (21 lbs bond)
Optional tray: 520
2
sheets of 80 g/m
(20 lbs bond)
2
2
70 to 89 g/m (19 to
24 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m (19 to
24 lbs bond)
2
•
150 sheets of 80 g/
•
150 sheets of 80 g/m
(21 lbs bond)
A6
2
m (21 lbs bond)
Not available in optional
tray.
146
5. Appendix
Specifications
a
Weight/Capacity
CLX-419xN /CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
Type
Size
Dimensions
Tray1
Manual feeder
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
2
2
2
2
Envelope
Envelope
Monarch
Envelope
No. 10
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)
75 to 90 g/m (20 to
24 lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 75 to 90 g/m (20 to
24 lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m (20 to
24 lbs bond)
24 lbs bond)
•
20 sheets
•
1 sheet
•
20 sheets
•
5 sheets
Not available in optional
tray.
Envelope
No. 9
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)
Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches)
2
2
2
2
Refer to the Plain paper section
Thick paper
90 to 104 g/m (24 to
28 lbs bond)
90 to 104 g/m (24 91 to 105 g/m (24 to 28 91 to 105 g/m (24 to 28
Refer to the
to 28 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
lbs bond)
Plain paper
section
2
•
50 sheets of 105 g/
•
1 sheet
• 10 sheets
•
50 sheets of 105 g/m
2
m (28 lbs bond)
(28 lbs bond)
2
2
2
2
Thicker
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section
164 to 220 g/m (43 to 164 to 220 g/m (43 164 to 220 g/m (43 to 59 164 to 220 g/m (43 to
Plain paper
section
paper
59 lbs bond)
to 59 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
59 lbs bond)
2
•
50 sheets of 220 g/
2
•
1 sheet
• 10 sheets)
•
50 sheets of 220 g/m
m (59 lbs bond)
(59 lbs bond)
Not available in optional
tray.
2
2
2
2
Thin paper
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section
60 to 69 g/m (16 to 19 60 to 69 g/m (16 to 60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19
60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19
lbs bond)
Plain paper
section
lbs bond)
19 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
2
•
250 sheets of 70 g/
•
1 sheet
•
50 sheets
•
250 sheets of 70 g/m
(19 lbs bond)
2
m (19 lbs bond)
147
5. Appendix
Specifications
a
Weight/Capacity
CLX-419xN /CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
Type
Size
Dimensions
Tray1
Manual feeder
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
2
2
2
2
Cotton, Color, Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 75 to 90 g/m (20 to 75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24
lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24
lbs bond)
Pre-printed
Plain paper
section
24 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
2
•
250 sheets of 80 g/
•
1 sheet
•
50 sheets
•
250 sheets of 80 g/m
(21 lbs bond)
2
m (21 lbs bond)
Not available in optional
tray.
2
2
2
2
Recycled
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section
70 to 90 g/m (19 to 24 70 to 90 g/m (19 to 70 to 90 g/m (19 to 24
70 to 90 g/m (19 to 24
lbs bond)
Plain paper
section
lbs bond)
24 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
2
•
250 sheets of 80 g/
•
1 sheet
•
50 sheets
•
250 sheets of 80 g/m
2
m (21 lbs bond)
(21 lbs bond)
2
2
2
2
Transparency Letter,
Legal, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
138 to 146 g/m (35 to 138 to 146 g/m (35 138 to 146 g/m (35 to 39 138 to 146 g/m (35 to
39 lbs bond)
to 39 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
39 lbs bond)
•
50 sheets
•
1 sheet
•
50 sheets
• 10 sheets
Not available in optional
tray.
d
2
2
2
2
Letter,
Labels
120 to 150 g/m (32 to 120 to 150 g/m (32 120 to 150 g/m (32 to 40 120 to 150 g/m (32 to
Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS
B5, ISO B5,
Executive,
A5
40 lbs bond)
to 40 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
40 lbs bond)
•
50 sheets
•
1 sheet
•
50 sheets
• 10 sheets
Not available in optional
tray.
148
5. Appendix
Specifications
a
Weight/Capacity
CLX-419xN /CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
Type
Size
Dimensions
Tray1
Manual feeder
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
2
2
2
2
Letter,
Refer to the Plain paper section
Card stock
121 to 163 g/m (32 to 121 to 163 g/m (32 121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 121 to 163 g/m (32 to
Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS
B5, ISO B5,
Executive,
A5
43 lbs bond)
to 43 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
43 lbs bond)
•
50 sheets
•
1 sheet
•
50 sheets
• 10 sheets
2
2
2
2
Bond paper
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section
Plain paper
section
105 to 120 g/m (28 to 105 to 120 g/m (28 105 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 105 to 120 g/m (28 to
32 lbs bond) to 32 lbs bond) lbs bond) 32 lbs bond)
•
•
50 sheets
250 sheets
•
•
1 sheet
1 sheet
•
•
50 sheets
250 sheets
•
•
10 sheets
50 sheets
Archive,
Punched
paper,
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section
Plain paper
section
Letterhead
149
5. Appendix
Specifications
a
Weight/Capacity
CLX-419xN /CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series
Type
Size
Dimensions
Tray1
Manual feeder
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
2
2
2
2
Letter, A4,
Postcard 4x6
Refer to the Plain paper section
Glossy Photo
111 to 130 g/m (30 to 111 to 130 g/m (30 111 to 130 g/m (30 to 35 111 to 130 g/m (30 to
35 lbs bond)
to 35 lbs bond)
lbs bond) for tray1
35 lbs bond)
•
30 sheets
•
1 sheet
•
•
Tray1: 30 sheets
• 5 sheets
Optional tray: 50
sheets
2
2
2
2
Refer to the Plain paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
131 to 175 g/m (35 to 131 to 175 g/m (35 131 to 175 g/m (35 to 47 131 to 175 g/m (35 to
47 lbs bond)
to 47 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
47 lbs bond)
•
30 sheets
•
1 sheet
•
•
Tray1: 30 sheets
• 5 sheets
Optional tray: 50
sheets
2
2
2
2
176 to 220 g/m (47 to 176 to 220 g/m (47 176 to 220 g/m (47 to 59 176 to 220 g/m (47 to
59 lbs bond)
to 59 lbs bond)
lbs bond)
59 lbs bond)
•
30 sheets
•
1 sheet
•
•
Tray1: 30 sheets
• 5 sheets
Optional tray: 50
sheets
2
2
2
2
Minimum size (custom)
Maximum size (custom)
•
•
•
Tray1: 98 x 127 mm (3.86 x 5
inches)
60 to 220 g/m ( 16 to 60 to 220 g/m ( 16
59 lbs bond) to 59 lbs bond)
•
•
60 to 220 g/m ( 16 to 60 to 220 g/m ( 16 to
59 lbs bond) for tray1
59 lbs bond)
Optional tray: 148.5 x 210 mm
(5.85 x 8.27inches)
2
60 to 163 g/m ( 16 to
43 lbs bond) for
optional tray.
Multi-Purpose tray/ Manual
Feeder: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5
inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
150
5. Appendix
Specifications
b. Post card 4 x 6 is supported for tray1, Manual feeder, or Multi-purpose tray.
c. Index card (3x5) is supported for Manual feeder and Multi-purpose tray.
d. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.
151
5. Appendix
Specifications
3
System requirements
Microsoft® Windows®
Requirement (recommended)
Operating system
CPU
Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
RAM
128 MB (256 MB)
128 MB (512 MB)
512 MB (2 GB)
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB (2 GB)
free HDD space
1.5 GB
®
®
®
Windows XP
®
®
®
1.25 GB to 2 GB
10 GB
Windows Server 2003
Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
®
®
®
Windows Server 2008
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)
®
®
®
15 GB
Windows Vista
Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz
®
®
®
16 GB
Windows 7
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
®
•
•
Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
DVD-R/W Drive
®
®
®
512 MB (2 GB)
10 GB
Windows Server 2008 R2
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)
•
•
•
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
Users who have administrator rights can install the software.
Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
152
5. Appendix
Specifications
Mac
Requirements (Recommended)
RAM
Operating system
CPU
Free HDD space
®
Mac OS X 10.4
Mac OS X 10.5
•
•
128 MB for a powerPC based Mac (512 MB)
512 MB for an Intel-based Mac (1 GB)
1 GB
•
•
Intel processors
PowerPC G4/G5
®
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB
•
•
Intel processors
867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5
®
Mac OS X 10.6
Mac OS X 10.7
1 GB (2 GB)
2 GB
1 GB
4 GB
•
•
Intel processors
®
Intel processors
153
5. Appendix
Specifications
Linux
Items
Requirements
®
Operating system
Redhat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
Fedora 5 ~ 13 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux 10.1 (32 bit)
®
OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit)
Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)
Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
CPU
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
512 MB (1 GB)
RAM
Free HDD space
1 GB (2 GB)
Unix
Items
Requirements
Sun Solaris 9, 10 (x86, SPARC)
Operating system
HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)
IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4
154
5. Appendix
Specifications
Items
Requirements
Free HDD space
Up to 100 MB
155
5. Appendix
Specifications
4
Network environment
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 5).
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Items
Network interface
Specifications
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan
•
•
•
802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN
®
®
®
®
®
Network operating system
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista , Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2
•
•
Various Linux OS
Mac OS X 10.4 ~10.7
•
•
UNIX OS
TCP/IPv4
Network protocols
•
•
•
•
DHCP, BOOTP
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
•
•
TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK)
Wireless security
•
Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES
156
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with
several regulatory statements.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
5
Laser safety statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-
1 : 2007.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service
condition.
Warning
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage
your eyes.
6
Ozone safety
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good
ventilation.
157
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
7
9
Mercury Safety
Recycling
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal
Laws.(U.S.A. only)
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an
environmentally responsible manner.
8
10
Power saver
China only
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that
reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on
your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified.
158
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
11
(The United States of America only)
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or
call, (877) 278 - 0799
(Applicable in the european union and other
european countries with separate collection
systems)
12
Taiwan only
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
13
Radio frequency emissions
Household users should contact either the retailer where they
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
FCC information to the user
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
159
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Canadian radio interference regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and
Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et
Sciences Canada.
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
14
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
United States of America
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
•
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the
United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.
160
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches)
from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless
device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the
RF exposure limits as set by the FCC.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain
a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
15
Russia only
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
161
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
16
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number
of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La
terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.
Germany only
17
Turkey only
20
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission the following information:
18
Thai only
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
1
2
the date and time of transmission
identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the
message; and
19
3
telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity
or individual.
Canada only
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables
d’Industrie Canada.
162
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain uninterrupted service
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm
to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that
they:
21
Ringer Equivalence Number
a promptly notify the customer.
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
You should also know that:
•
•
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your
machine.
163
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
•
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or
telephone and electronic specialty stores.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded
plug.
•
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you
plug it into a socket.
•
•
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
22
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
•
•
•
Green and Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
Important
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or
colored black.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
164
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
representative.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
23
Declaration of conformity (European countries)
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (FAX)
Approvals and Certifications
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European
countries:
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xN Series/
CLX-626xND Series] is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Low Voltage
Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC).
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xFN Series/
CLX-419xFW Series/CLX-626xFD Series/CLX-626xFR Series/CLX-
626xFW Series] is in compliance with the essential requirements
and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure
network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained
in this document.
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of
the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
165
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
No limitations at this time
European radio approval information (for products
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
24
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label
to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Israel only
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for
use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a
Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the
system label.
25
Regulatory compliance statements
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European
Commission through the R&TTE directive.
Wireless guidance
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. The following section is a general overview of
considerations while operating a wireless device.
European states qualified under wireless approvals:
EU countries
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in
the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be
allowed.
European states with restrictions on use:
EU
In France, this equipment may only be used indoors.
EEA/EFTA countries
166
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less
energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.
Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact
during normal operation.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and
Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples
where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in
environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless
devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or
turning on the wireless device.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio
Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on
the use of a wireless device in the destination country.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields
are in place and the system is fully assembled.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of
common restrictions are listed below:
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with
equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations
require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane.
IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth
communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless
communication.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
167
5. Appendix
Regulatory information
26
China only
168
5. Appendix
Copyright
© 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
•
•
•
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
•
•
•
•
Google, Picasa, Google Cloud Print, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV. 1.03
169
5. Appendix
User’s Guide
CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN Series
CLX-419xFW Series
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series
CLX-626xFW Series
ADVANCED
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration,
operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting
on windows.
1. Software Installation
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the
machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using
the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network
connected machine’s driver (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 181).
•
•
If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine’s driver (see
Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).
Installation for Mac
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
1
14
15
•
For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.7, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2
Click Add on the Printer List.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
3
•
For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.7, click the “+” folder icon; a display window
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
will pop up.
4
Click Continue.
Click Default Browser and find the USB connection.
5
16
17
•
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click Default and find the USB connection.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
6
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung
in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
7
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
•
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
8
Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default
machine.
Click Continue on the User Options Pane.
9
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
10
Click Add.
18
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
To install the fax driver:
Enter the password and click OK.
a Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Fax Queue Creator.
b Your machine appears on the Printer List
c Select machine to use and click Create button
11
Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue
Installation.
12
After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart.
13
172
1. Software Installation
Reinstallation for Mac
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
3
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Uninstaller OS X icon.
4
Enter the password and click OK.
5
When the uninstall is done, click OK.
6
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility
or Print & Fax.
173
1. Software Installation
Installation for Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
Support or Downloads).
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon
and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you
have any difficulties, consult the on-screen help that is available through your
system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified
Driver Configurator or Image Manager.
1
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package
to your computer.
3
Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package.
4
Double click cdroot > autorun.
5
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
6
When the installation is complete, click Finish.
7
174
1. Software Installation
Reinstallation for Linux
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
Open the Terminal program. When the Terminal screen appears, type in
the following.
3
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
Click Next.
4
Click Finish.
5
175
1. Software Installation
2. Using a Network-
Connected Machine
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software.
• AirPrint
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by
Useful network programs
2
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing
network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network
machines from any site with corporate internet access.
•
•
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
1
3
SyncThru™ Web Service
SetIP wired network setup
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
•
•
•
Check the supplies information and status.
Customize machine settings.
•
•
•
Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine
status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain
person's email automatically.
•
•
The machine that does not support the network port, it will not be able
to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).
•
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to
various network environments.
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
177
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wired network setup
4
5
Printing a network configuration report
Setting IP address
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel
that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set
up a network.
•
•
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements.
In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
•
•
The machine has the display screen: Press the
(Menu) button on the
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)
control panel and select Network > Network Configuration.
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control
Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.
The machine has the touch screen: Press Setup from the Main screen >
Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Network Configuration.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC
address and IP address.
Install this program from the supplied CD-ROM by double-click
Application > SetIP > Setup.exe.
1
For example:
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
2
•
•
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78
IP Address: 169.254.192.192
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
3
Turn on the machine.
4
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
5
178
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wired network setup
Click the
IP configuration window.
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)
6
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences > Security > Firewall.
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information
assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
7
The following instructions may vary from your model.
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
1
Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
2
Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows the
3
printer’s name and IP address information.
Click the
IP configuration window.
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
4
5
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
8
179
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wired network setup
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
Select Apply, then OK, and OK again.
The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration
Report.
6
5
Quit Safari.
7
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences or Administrator.
The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems.
Open /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
1
Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.
2
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
3
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
4
180
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Select Install Now.
3
•
•
•
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the
software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select
Software to Install window.
6
Windows
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
1
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License
Agreement. Then, click Next.
4
5
If your machine is not found on the network or locally, an error message
appears. Select the option you want and click Next.
Choose the option in Using Enhanced Features and Participating in
Printer Usage Information Collection Program. Then, click Next.
181
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
6
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be
operated solely.
If the Connect Device window appears, check that the machine is
connected to your network. Then, click Next.
7
The firewall software might be blocking network communication. Before
connecting the device to the network, disable the computer’s firewall.
Command- line
/s or
/S
Definition
Description
Starts silent installation.
Installs machine drivers
without prompting any UIs or
user intervention.
The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you
wish to use and click OK.
8
9
/p”<port name>” or Specifies printer port.
/P”<port name>”
Printer port name can be
specified as IP address,
hostname, USB local port
name or IEEE1284 port name.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Network Port will be
created by use of
Standard TCP/IP
Port monitor. For
local port, this port
must exist on
system before
being specified by
command.
Silent installation Mode
For example:
•
/p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
means IP address for
network printer. /
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software
are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation
by typing /s or /S in the command window.
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /
p”hostname”
Command-line Parameters
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.
182
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Command- line
Definition
Description
Command- line
/x or
Definition
Description
/a”<dest_path>” or Specifies destination path
Since machine drivers should
be installed on the OS specific
location, this command
applies to only application
software.
Uses existing machine
driver files to create printer way to install a printer
instance if it is already
installed.
This command provides a
for installation.
/A”<dest_path>”
/X
instance that uses installed
printer driver files without
installing an additional driver.
The destination
path should be a
fully qualified path.
/up”<printer
name>” or
Removes only specified
printer instance and not the way to remove only specified
This command provides a
driver files.
printer instance from your
system without effecting
other printer drivers. It will
not remove printer driver files
from your system.
/UP”<printer
name>”
/n”<Printer name>” Specifies printer name.
With this parameter, you can
add printer instances as your
or
Printer instance shall be
created as specified printer wishes.
name.
/N”<Printer name>”
/d or
/D
Uninstalls all device drivers This command will remove all
and applications from your installed device drivers and
/nd or
/ND
Commands not to set the
installed driver as a default driver will not be the default
machine driver.
It indicates installed machine
system.
application software from
your system.
machine driver on your
system if there are one or
more printer drivers installed.
If there is no installed
machine driver on your
system, then this option
won’t be applied because
Windows OS will set installed
printer driver as a default
machine driver.
/v”<share name>” or Shares installed machine
It will install all supported
Windows OS platform’s
and add other available
/V”<share name>”
platform drivers for Point & machine drivers to system
Print.
and share it with specified
<share name> for point and
print.
/o or
/O
Opens Printers and Faxes This command will open
folder after installation.
Printers and Faxes folder
after the silent installation.
183
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
When the message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
8
Command- line
Definition
Description
/f”<log filename>”
or
Specifies log filename.
It will create a log file to a
specified folder.
Click Continue on the User Options Pane.
The default log file is
created in the system temp
folder if not specified.
9
/F”<log filename>”
If you have not set the IP address yet, click Set IP address and refer to "IPv4
configuration using SetIP (Mac)" on page 179. If you want to set the wireless
/h, /H or /?
Shows Command-line Usage.
7
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
10
Mac
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on.
1
Enter the password and click OK.
11
12
Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue
Installation.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
2
3
4
5
6
7
After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart.
13
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
184
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung
in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
14
20
•
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
•
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, if Auto Select does not work properly, choose
Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using.
Click Add on the Printer List.
15
Click Add.
21
•
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click the “+” icon. A display window will pop
Your machine appears in the Printer List, and is set as the default
up.
machine.
For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.
16
17
•
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click IP.
To install the fax driver:
a Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Fax Queue Creator.
b Your machine appears on the Printer List.
c Select machine to use and Click Create button.
Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance
may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option.
8
Linux
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.
18
19
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
185
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Install the Linux driver and add network printer
Add a network printer
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.
Click Add Printer.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website.
2
The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
Select Network printer and click the Search button.
The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
Select your machine and click Next.
Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory.
3
Double-click the cdroot > autorun.
4
The Samsung installer window opens. Click Next.
5
The add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
6
Enter the printer description and click Next.
After the machine is added, click Finish.
Select network printer and click Search button.
7
The machine’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
8
9
Select your machine and click Next.
9
UNIX
Input the printer description and Next.
10
After the machine is added, click Finish.
•
•
•
Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before
installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 5).
11
When installation is done, click Finish.
The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not
type “”.
12
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
186
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver
package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver
package from the Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com > find your
product > Support or Downloads).
Run the install script.
6
“./install –i”
install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the
UNIX Printer Driver package.
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the
installer script.
Installing the UNIX printer driver package
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation results.
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.
7
8
Run “installprinter” from the command line. This will bring up the Add
Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to
the following procedures.
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer
1
Driver package to your computer.
Acquire root privileges.
2
“su -”
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be
enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two
commands on the root terminal:
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.
3
“accept <printer_name>”
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.
“enable <printer_name>”
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.
4
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands.
“gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -”
Go to the unpacked directory.
5
187
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Installing driver over the network
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional.
Uninstalling the printer driver package
4
5
6
Specify the printer location in the Location field.
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.
a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.
It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.
b Select the printer to be deleted.
c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.
d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole package.
e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c” command.
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for
network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type,
only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the
corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris
OS.
7
Select Copies to set the number of copies.
8
To re-install it, use the command “. /install –i” to reinstall the binaries.
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order.
Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.
Click OK to add the printer.
9
10
11
12
Setting up the printer
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command
line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this
window according to the following steps:
Type the name of the printer.
1
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.
2
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the
Type field. This is optional.
3
188
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
IPv6 configuration
10
IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
From the control panel
Activating IPv6
•
•
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and
managements.
Select
control panel.
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the
1
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with
FE80).
Or select Setup> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP
•
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network
(IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the touch screen.
router.
Select On and press OK.
2
3
•
•
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6
address.
When you install the printer driver, do not configure both IPv4 and IPv6. We
recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6.
189
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
IPv6 configuration
11
DHCPv6 address configuration
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following
options for default dynamic host configuration.
Activating IPv6
•
•
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter
the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and
press the Enter key or click Go.
1
2
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
Select
control panel.
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the
1
2
Or select Setup> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP
(IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the touch screen.
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
Press OK to select the required value you want.
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the mouse
cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network
Settings.
•
•
•
DHCPv6 address: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.
3
Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.
Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6.
Click the Apply button.
4
5
6
7
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
190
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
IPv6 configuration
•
•
You can also set the DHCPv6.
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.
To manually set the IPv6 address:
Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text
box is activated. Enter the rest of the address
(e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A
through F).
IPv6 address configuration
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
1
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless
2
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network
Configuration Report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address
starts with FE80).
•
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a
network router.
•
•
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).
3
191
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Wireless network name and network password
•
Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless
networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up,
a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Password are
created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information
before proceeding with the machine installation.
•
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network settings
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
12
Getting started
Understanding your network type
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the
machine at a time.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
Ad hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless
computer and wireless machine communicate directly.
192
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
13
Introducing wireless set up methods
You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting method from the below table.
Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country.
Set up method
With Access Point
Connecting method
From the computer
Description & Reference
Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable (recommended)" on page 198.
A
B
C
D
From the machine’s control panel
•
•
Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 200.
Mac user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 205.
E
F
Without Access Point
From the computer
Wi-Fi Direct setup
G
H
If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 212).
193
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
14
Choosing your type
Using the WPS button
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by
using the
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your
machine to a wireless network by pressing both the (WPS) button on the
(WPS) button on the control panel.
pressing the
(WPS) button on the control panel without a computer.
control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.
•
•
If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to
connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide
of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your
machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-
Fi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a
typical wireless network environment.
When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings
may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless
security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access
point (or wireless router) you are using.
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, follow the next
procedure:
a Press Setup from the Main screen.
b Press Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS
Items to prepare
Settings.
•
Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS).
c Select the setup method you want.
•
•
Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
Networked computer (PIN mode only)
194
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Connecting in PIN mode
Machines with a display (or touch) screen
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, press Setup
> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings.
1
Connecting in PBC mode
Press PIN (or Connect via PIN).
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, press Setup
> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings.
2
1
Press OK when the confirmation window appears.
3
Press PBC (or Connect via PBC).
2
The eight-digit PIN appears on the display.
4
Press OK when the confirmation window appears.
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
3
Information window appears showing 2 minutes connection processing
time.
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network.
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
4
b
Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a
b
c
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or
wireless router).
c
SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection
process, the AP’s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display.
Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
5
AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process,
the AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
5
195
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Connecting in PIN mode
Machines without a display screen
The network configuration report, including PIN, must be printed (see
1
Connecting in PBC mode
In ready mode, press and hold the
the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN.
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button on
Press and hold the
seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4
1
2
The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks
slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the
access point (or wireless router).
Press and hold the
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than
2
3
4 seconds until the status LED stays on.
The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to
the access point (or wireless router).
The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-
digit PIN.
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless
network, the WPS LED light stays on.
The WPS LED blinks in the order below:
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to
the access point (or wireless router).
3
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless
network, the WPS LED light stays on.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
4
196
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Re-connecting to a network
Disconnecting from a network
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect
to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless
connection settings and address.
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the
the control panel for more than two seconds.
(WPS) button on
•
When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately
disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off.
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the
wireless network:
•
When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the
current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the
wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS
•
•
The machine is turned off and on again.
The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.
LED turns off.
15
Canceling the connection process
Using the menu button or touch screen
To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to
the wireless network, press and release the
(Stop or Stop/Clear) on the
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "CLX-419xFW/ CLX-
control panel. You need to wait 2 minutes to re-connect to the wireless
network.
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
197
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Access point via USB cable (recommended)
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the
Items to prepare
•
•
•
•
•
Access point
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
Select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Network Setup > Wireless >
WLAN Settings on the touch screen.
1
Press the OK to select the setup method you want.
2
•
•
Search List (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic.
The machine will display a list of available networks from which to
choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the
corresponding security key.
Creating the infrastructure network
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
Custom: In this mode, users can give or edit manually their own SSID
1
, or choose the security option in detail.
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
2
16
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Setup using Windows
Click Install Now.
4
Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
5
Shortcut to the Wireless Setting program without the CD: If you have
installed the printer driver once, you can access the Wireless Setting
program without the CD. From the Start menu, select Programs or All
Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Wireless
Setting Program.
Choose the option in Using Enhanced Features and Participating in
Printer Usage Information Collection Program. Then, click Next.
6
198
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
•
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
Select Configure the wireless network connection using USB cable
on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then click Next.
7
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
8
If the wireless network is already set up, the Wireless Network
Information window appears. Select I want to install software with
the current settings. (Recommended). Then, click Next.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security settings.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
When the network connection window appears, disconnect the network
cable. Then, click Next. The network cable connection can interfere with
searching for wireless devices.
9
•
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
•
•
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
•
•
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP AES).
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
199
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct, the following screen appears.
Select the components to be installed. Click Next.
10
13
14
Click Next.
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name,
set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the
default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click Next.
If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and
receive useful information, click On-line Registration. If not, click
Finish.
15
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
•
•
•
Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Items to prepare
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
•
•
•
•
Network-connected computer
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
11
12
Click Next when the Printers Found window appears.
200
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
1
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
2
•
•
•
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
3
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
Click Install Now.
4
•
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
5
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security enabled.
Choose the option in Using Enhanced Features and Participating in
Printer Usage Information Collection Program. Then, click Next.
6
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
•
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
Select Configure the wireless network connection using USB cable
on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then click Next.
7
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
8
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
9
•
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
•
•
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
201
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
10
11
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
Click Next when the Printers Found window appears.
12
13
14
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the
static IP address.
Select the components to be installed. Click Next.
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name,
set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the
default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click Next.
•
•
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and
receive useful information, click On-line Registration. If not, click
Finish.
15
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
17
Setup using Mac
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:
Items to prepare
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
•
•
•
•
Access point
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43
Network-connected computer
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
202
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
USB cable
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
11
If the wireless network is already set up, the Wireless Network
Information window appears. Select I want to install software with
the current settings. (Recommended). Then, click Next.
Access point via USB cable (recommended)
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
1
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
2
•
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
(SSID is case-sensitive).
3
•
•
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
4
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret
key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8
•
Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your
9
TKIP, AES)
computer appears, click Continue.
•
•
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
Click Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane.
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
10
•
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
203
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security enabled.
•
•
•
Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct, the following screen appears.
12
Click Next.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine.
13
14
Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished,
click Quit.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
204
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Ad hoc via USB cable
8
9
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Click Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane.
10
11
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
Items to prepare
•
•
•
•
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
USB cable
•
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is case-
sensitive).
•
•
•
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
1
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
2
•
•
•
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
3
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
4
•
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
205
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security setting.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
•
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP
address.
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
•
•
For the DHCP method
12
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is shown as follows:
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as shown below:
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
206
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is
confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next.
13
•
•
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the
machine when configuring the wireless network.
See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless
network, for information about your network configuration.
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.
14
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click
Quit.
15
Items to prepare
•
•
•
•
•
Access point
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
Network-connected computer
Software CD that was provided with your machine
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
Network cable
18
Using a network cable
Printing a network configuration report
Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network
configuration report.
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.
207
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If
not, connect the machine with a standard network cable.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
1
2
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report.
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3
4
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
5
6
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Click Wireless > Wizard.
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection
status.
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if
you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom.
208
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
7
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should
then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc
mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.
•
SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless
network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect
to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is
case sensitive.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
•
Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
10
19
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off
-
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
If your machine has a display, you can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the
machine’s control panel using the Network menu.
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the
access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID.
Note that “portthru” is the default SSID of your machine.
Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
1
Click Next.
8
9
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
2
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network password) and click Next.
For example,
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If
the setup is right, click Apply.
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3
209
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
4
•
•
You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the
printer’s Wi-Fi Direct.
•
•
ID: admin
The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct
networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP
services.
Password: sec00000
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
•
The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct
is 3.
5
6
Click Wireless > Custom.
You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct
20
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended)
Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the
Wi-Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure
connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode.
After the driver installation is complete, Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be
set and changes in the Wi-Fi Direct can be made.
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while
concurrently connecting to an access point, You can also use a wired network
and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print
documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows
and Mac OS users only.
-
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Device Settings >
Network.
▪
Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable.
210
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
▪
Device Name: Enter the printer’s name for searching for your
printer on a wireless network. By default, the device name is the
model name.
From the network-connected computer
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable
and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru™ Web Service.
▪
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is
used only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired
or wireless network. We recommend using the default local IP
address (the default local IP address of the printer for Wi-Fi Direct is
192.168.3.1 )
•
Access SyncThru™ Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings >
Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
•
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options.
▪
▪
Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi
Direct group’s owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless
access point. We recommend activating this option.
•
For Linux OS users,
-
-
-
Print an IP network configuration report to check the output (see
Network Password: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network
Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your
printer. You can configure a network password yourself, or can
remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated
by default.
Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings
> Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct.
Setting up the mobile device
From the machine (Machines with a display screen)
•
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the
mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
•
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing
application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your
smartphone.
•
•
Select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Network Setup > Wireless > Wi-Fi
Direct on the touch screen.
Enable Wi-Fi Direct.
211
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
Connecting Failure - SSID Not Found
•
When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your
mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the
WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile
device.
•
The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or
entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try
connecting again.
•
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you need to enter
the "Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button.
•
Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security
21
•
Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your
access point and machine.
Troubleshooting for wireless network
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error
Problems during setup or driver installation
•
Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB
cable and your machine’s power.
Printers Not Found
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network
•
•
•
Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the
machine.
•
Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired
network cable from your machine.
USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect
the machine to your computer using the USB cable.
Connecting Failure - Assigning the IP address
The machine does not support wireless networking. Check the machine's
user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and
prepare a wireless network machine.
•
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router) and machine.
PC Connection Error
•
The configured network address is unable to connect between your
computer and machine.
212
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
3 Change the printer port's IP address if it is different from the network
-
For a DHCP network environment
information report's.
If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP,
Connect to a network printer. Then reconnect the IP address.
The machine receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when
computer is configured to DHCP.
If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode, the problem may be caused
by the automatically changed IP address. Compare the IP address between
the product's IP address and the printer port's IP address.
-
For a Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured
to static address.
How to compare:
For example,
1 Print the network information report of your printer, and then check the
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
2 Check the printer port's IP address from your computer.
a Click the Windows Start menu.
▪
▪
IP address: 169.254.133.42
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
b For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
Then the machine’s network information should be as below:
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
▪
▪
▪
IP address: 169.254.133.43
•
•
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
c Right-click your machine.
d For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
Other problems
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
drivers connected with selected printer.
e Click Port tab.
f Click Configure Port... button.
g Check if Printer Name or IP Address: is the IP address on the network
configuration Sheet.
213
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the
settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the
machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset.
Register the product's MAC address when you confogure the DHCP server
on the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP
address that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the Mac address
of your machine by printing a network configuration report (see "Printing a
•
•
You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time.
Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be
turned on.
•
•
•
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from
the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the
signal.
•
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
communication.
•
•
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista,
you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use
the wireless machine.
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it
cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and
try searching for the machine again.
•
You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for
Samsung wireless network machines.
•
•
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
•
•
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless
signal.
Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless
router) administrator.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not
separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.
214
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Wireless network setup
•
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave
oven and some Bluetooth devices.
•
Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router)
changes, you must do the product's wireless network setup again.
•
•
The maximum number of device that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3.
If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, the connection between the AP and the machine will be
the 802.11 b/g interface.
215
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Samsung MobilePrint
22
24
What is Samsung MobilePrint?
Supported Mobile OS
Samsung MobilePrint is a free application that enables users to print photos,
documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung
MobilePrint is not only compatible with your Android, Windows and iOS smart
phones but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile
device to a network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through
a Wi-Fi access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn’t
necessary – just simply install the Samsung MobilePrint application, and it will
automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos,
web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have Samsung
multfunction printer, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for
quick and easy viewing on your mobile device.
•
•
•
Android OS 2.1 or higher
iOS 4.0 or higher
Windows Phone 7 or higher
25
Supported devices
•
•
iOS 4.0 or higher: iPod Touch, iPhone, iPad
Android 2.1 or higher: Galxy S, Galaxy S2, Galaxy Tab, and Android mobile
devices
23
•
Windows Phone 7 or higher: Samsung Focus, Omnia7, and OmniaW, and
Windows mobile devices
Downloading Samsung MobilePrint
To download Samsung MobilePrint, go to the application store (Samsung
Apps, Android Market, App Store, Marketplace) on your mobile device, and just
search for “Samsung MobilePrint.” You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices
or Marketplace for Windows devices on your computer.
216
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
AirPrint
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. If it’s your first time
logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and
password. We recommend you to change the default password for
security reasons.
4
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-419xFW Series only.
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad,
and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS.
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings.
26
5
6
Setting up AirPrint
Click Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP or mDNS .
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the
AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following
methods.
You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNS protocol.
27
Printing via AirPrint
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
1
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
2
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
For example,
1
Touch the action icon(
).
2
3
4
Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.
Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3
Touch Print button. Print it out.
217
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
AirPrint
Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary,
click the print center icon ( ) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in
the print center.
218
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your
smart phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your
Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud
Print™ service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome
browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™ application on your mobile device, so you
don’t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. Refer to the Google
website (http://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/ or http://
Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
5
6
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
•
•
ID: admin
support.google.com/cloudprint) for more information about Google Cloud
Print™.
Password: sec00000
28
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure
the proxy’s IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >
Google Cloud Print > Proxy Setting. Contact your network service
provider or network administrator for more information.
Registering your Google account to the printer
•
•
Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
wireless network that has access to the Internet.
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings > Google Cloud Print.
You should create your Google account in the advance.
7
Enter your printer’s name and description.
8
9
Open the Chrome browser.
1
2
3
4
Click Register.
Visit www.google.com.
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail™ address.
If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not
appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.
Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key
or click Go.
219
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Google Cloud Print™
Click Finish printer registration.
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
10
1
Click Manage your printers.
11
If you do not have the application, download it from the application store
such as Android Market or App Store.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.
Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.
29
2
3
4
5
6
7
Printing with Google Cloud Print™
Tap the option
Tap the send
button of the document that you want to print.
button.
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you
are using. You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™
service.
Tap the Cloud Print
button.
Set the printing options if you want.
Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet.
Tap Click here to Print.
Printing from the Chrome browser
Printing from an application on mobile device
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from
Android mobile phone.
Run Chrome.
1
Open the document or email that you want to print.
2
Click the wrench icon
in the browser’s top right corner.
3
4
Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.
220
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Google Cloud Print™
Select Print with Google Cloud Print.
5
Click the Print button.
6
221
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
Before you begin reading a chapter
This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features.
You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide (see "Menu overview" on page 33).
The following are tips for using this chapter
•
•
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
(Menu).
•
•
For models that do not have the
(Menu) on the control panel, this feature is not applicable (see "Control panel overview" on page 24).
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
223
3. Useful Setting Menus
Print
Item
Description
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Specifies the number of dots printed per inch (dpi). The
higher the setting, the sharper printed characters and
graphics.
Resolution
Clear Text
Emulation
Prints text darker than on a normal document.
Sets the emulation type and option.
To change the menu options:
•
•
Press
(Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel.
•
Emulation Type: The machine language defines how
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Print Setup on the touch screen.
the computer communicates with the machine.
•
Setup: Sets the detailed settings for the selected
emulation type.
Item
Description
It allows user to enhance sharpness of text and graphics
for improving readability.
Selects the direction in which information is printed on a
page.
Edge Enhance
Trapping
It reduces the white gap caused by misalignment of color
channels in color printing mode. Also black text will be
overprinted on other colors.
•
Portrait
This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color
output.
Orientation
•
Normal: This mode will generate printouts with
smooth tone over the entire page.
•
Landscape
Screen
•
Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with
sharp texts and smooth graphic/photo objects in the
page.
•
Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with
sharp details over the entire page.
You can enter the number of copies using the number
keypad.
Copies
Select Tray
Sets the select tray type.
224
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
1
Item
Description
Copy feature
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Reduce/Enlarge
If the machine is set Eco mode, reduce and
enlarge features are not available.
To change the menu options:
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 71)
Darkness
•
Press
Or
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Improves the copy quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job (see "Original Type" on
Original Type
•
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Copy Default
on the touch screen.
You can sets whether to use Auto color on or off.
Or press Copy > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
•
On: Select this setting to automatically detect
whether the scanned document is in color or black
and white, and then select an appropriate color
setting.
Auto Color
Item
Description
Original Size
Sets the image size.
Basic Copy
Copies can be started quickly.
You can enter the number of copies using the number
keypad.
Copies
Custom Copy
Copies can be customized through detailed options.
225
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
Item
Description
Item
Auto Fit Copy
Layout
Description
You can select the default color mode to use for copy
jobs.
Copies image to fit automatically to the paper size.
Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy, 2/4-up, etc.
•
Auto: Select this setting to automatically detect
whether the scanned document is in color or black
and white, and then select an appropriate color
setting.
ID Copy
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item
such as business card (see "ID card copying" on page
73).
Color Mode
•
•
Color: Select this setting to print the same as the
original image color.
•
•
Collation
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you
make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page
document will print followed by a second complete
document.
Collation Copy
Mono: Select this setting to print the copy in black
and white, regardless whether the scanned
document is in color or in black and white.
•
On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of
originals.
Allows you to check the current tray settings and
change the settings if necessary.
Tray
Auto: You can set the machine to automatically
to the tray with the same sized paper when the
tray in use is empty.
•
Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual
pages.
You can apply the stamp feature.
•
Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page
number, device information, comment, or user ID, to
the copy output.
Stamp
•
•
Opacity: You can select the transparency.
Position: Sets the position.
226
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
Item
Description
Item
Description
•
•
2-up or 4-up
Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4
pages onto one sheet of paper.
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire
book. If the book is too thick, lift the cover until its
hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the
cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,
start copying with the cover open.
N-up Copy
1
2
3
4
•
•
Off: Does not use this feature.
Book Copy
Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the
book.
•
•
Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the
book.
Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of
the book.
This copy feature is available only when you
place originals on the scanner glass.
227
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
Item
Description
Item
Description
•
•
Adjust Bkgd.
Prints an image without its background. This copy
feature removes the background color and can be
helpful when copying an original containing color in
the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog.
Allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold creases and
staple marks along any of the four edges of a document.
Adjust Background
•
•
•
Off: Does not use this feature.
Auto: Optimizes the background.
Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the
more vivid the background is.
•
•
Off: Does not use this feature.
SmallOriginal: rases the edge of the original if it is
small. This feature is available only when you place
originals on the scanner glass.
Edge Erase
•
Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter
the background is.
•
•
Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.
Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper
which is black and horizontal, when you copy a
book. This feature is available only when you place
originals on the scanner glass.
•
Border Erase: Enter the left, right, top, bottom
margin using Number keypad.
228
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
Item
Description
Item
Description
The watermark option allows you to print text over an
existing document. For example, you use it when you
want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or
“CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first
page or all pages of a document.
•
•
•
2->1Sided
2->2Sided
Watermark
Duplex (continue)
2->1Sided Rotated
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of
paper.
•
1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints it on
one side of the paper.
•
1->2Sided
Duplex
•
1->2Sided Rotated
229
3. Useful Setting Menus
Copy
2
Copy Setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
Press
Or
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
Item
Change Default
Description
The copy options can be set to those most frequently
used.
230
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
3
Item
Description
Fax Feature
The default document settings procedure good results
when using typical text-based originals. However, if you
send originals that are of poor quality, or contain
photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce
a higher quality fax (see "Resolution" on page 79).
Resolution
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Selects the color mode in which you want to send the
fax.
Color Mode
To change the menu options:
•
•
Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.
Color: Transmits a fax in color.
•
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel.
This function is especially intended for two-sided
originals. You can select whether the machine sends
the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
•
•
Or press Fax > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side
only.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
•
•
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
Item
Description
Duplex
Original Size
Sets the image size.
Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the
original document being scanned.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the
originals on the DADF. If the machine cannot
detect the original on the DADF, it
Original Type
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 80).
Memory Send
Fax can be customized through detailed options.
231
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
Item
Description
Access a dial tone to send fax.
Item
Description
On Hook Dial
Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax or PC. If you are out of office but have to receive
the fax, this feature may be useful.
Speed Dial Send
Group Dial Send
Fax image to destination from speed dial list.
Fax image to destination from group dial list.
Send Forward
•
Receive Forward
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller
ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number
•
Redial
Stores the received fax in memory without printing out.
To print received documents, you need to enter the
password. You can prevent your received faxes from
being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving
Secure Receive
Cancel Job
Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax
Multi Send
Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
4
•
•
Delay Send
Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you
will not be present (see "Delaying a fax transmission" on
Delayed Send
Sending setup
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
232
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
To change the menu options:
Item
Description
•
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel.
Select the maximum modem speed you want if the
phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed. You
can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4, 12.0, 9.6 or 4.8 kbps.
Modem speed
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of
the first page of the fax sent.
Image TCR
Dial Mode
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This
setting may not be available depending on your
country.
Item
Redial Times
Redial Term
Description
Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the
machine will not redial.
Sends faxes at a preset toll-saving time to save on call
costs. This setting may not be available depending on
your country.
Toll Save
Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.
Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials
before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful
for accessing a PABX exchange.
Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options
such as machine ID, fax number, etc.
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Setup Wizard
Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to
makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any
error. It may take more time.
5
Receiving setup
•
•
Fax Confirmation
Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax
transmission was successfully completed or not.
Fax Send
Confirmation
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
233
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
To change the menu options:
Item
Description
•
•
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control panel.
Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer
several different telephone numbers. You can set the
machine to recognize different ring patterns for each
number. This setting may not be available depending
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
DRPD Mode
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper.
You can save the paper usage.
Item
Description
Receive Mode
•
•
Off: Prints only one side of the paper.
Duplex Print
Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however,
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before
answering an incoming call.
the binding will be the long edge.
Ring To Answer
•
Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however,
the binding will be the short edge.
Automatically prints the page number, and the date
and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a
received fax.
Stamp RCV Name
Initiates fax reception from an extension phone
plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the
machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear
fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the
factory.
Rcv Start Code
Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the
size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Discards a specific length from the end of the received
fax.
234
3. Useful Setting Menus
Fax
6
Change Default setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Change Default on the control
panel.
Item
Description
The fax options can be set to those most frequently
used.
Change Default
235
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
7
Item
Description
Scan feature
•
•
•
FTP Feature
FTP Default
FTP
Sets scan destination to an FTP server. You scan the
originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
•
•
•
SMB Feature
SMB Default
SMB
Sets scan destination to an SMB server. You scan the
originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server
To change the menu options:
Sets scan destination to a usb-connected computer.
You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a
Local PC
•
Press
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.
Or Scan to >
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.
Sets scan destination to a network-connected
computer. You scan the originals and save the scanned
image to a directory such as My Documents (see
•
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Scan Default
on the touch screen.
Network PC
Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item
Description
•
•
•
USB Default
USB Feature
USB
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals
and save the scanned image to a USB device.
•
•
•
Email Default
Custom Email
Scan to Email
Sets scan destination to an email. You scan the originals
and email the scanned image to destinations (see
236
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
Item
Description
Item
Description
Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If
you select JPEG, TIFF, XPS or PDF, you can select to scan
multiple pages. Depending on the selected scan type,
this option may not appear.
Sets scan destination to a shared folder. You can create
and use the shared folder (see "Using shared folder
Shared Folder
8
•
Single-TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged
Image File Format), and several originals are scanned
as an each individual TIFF file.
Scan setup
•
Multi-TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image
File Format), but several originals are scanned as one
file.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
•
•
•
•
•
Single-PDF: Scans the originals in PDF, and several
originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file.
Multi-PDF: Scans originals in PDF, but several
originals are scanned as one file.
File Format
To change the menu options:
Single-XPS: Scans the originals in XPS, and several
originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file.
•
Press
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.
Multi-XPS: Scans originals in XPS, but several
originals are scanned as one file.
Or Scan to >
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
•
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Scan Default
on the touch screen.
•
•
XPS: This feature is only supported for the
devices that has mass storage.
Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected in
the File Format option, if Mono has been
selected for Color Mode.
Item
Destination
Description
Enter the destinations information.
237
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
Item
Description
Item
Description
The scan options can be set to those most frequently
used.
Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper (1
Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides
of the paper (2 Sided Rotated).
Change Default
Original Size
Original Type
Resolution
Sets the image size.
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side
Sets the original document’s type.
Sets the image resolution.
only.
•
•
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on
You can select the color options of scan outputs.
Duplex
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
•
Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per
pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, the
machine shows the window asking to place
another page. Load another original and press
Yes. When you finish, select No for this option.
•
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image.
8 bits per pixel.
Color Mode
•
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit
per pixel.
You can choose the policy for generating file name
before you proceed with the scan job through server or
USB memory device. If the server or the USB memory
device already has the same name you enter, you can
change the name, cancel the job, or overwrite it.
File Policy
File Name
•
Rename: The sent file is saved as a different file
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to scan.
name that is automatically programmed.
•
Overwrite: Overwrites the existing the file.
Makes a file name to store the scan data.
238
3. Useful Setting Menus
Scan
Item
Description
Item
Description
You can set the machine to print server confirmation
result report.
CC
Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient.
The same as CC but the recipient's name is not
displayed.
BCC
Server Confirmation
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on the
connected computer if it supports the WSD (Web
Service for Device) feature.
WSD
You can set the machine to print email confirmation
result report.
•
•
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
Email Confirmation
If a report contains characters or fonts that
the machine does not support, Unknown
could be printed instead of the characters/
fonts in the report.
Encrypts the PDF files when you scan the originals in
PDF format. Select On to encrypt the PDF file, and set
up a password. To open the file, users need to enter the
password
PDF Encryption
Subject
From
Sets an email’s subject one.
Sets a sender’s email address one.
239
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
9
Item
Description
Machine setup
Receive Mode
Selects the default fax receiving mode.
This feature works best when you are using an extension
telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of
your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you
are talking to on the extension telephone, without going
to the fax machine. *9* is the remote receive code preset
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Receive code
To change the menu options:
Select Country
Sound/Volume
Sets the select country.
•
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel.
Sets the sound/volume option.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup on the touch
screen.
If toner in the cartridge has run out, a message informing
the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can
set the option for this message to appear or not.
Toner Status Alert
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > select the menu item you want on the
touch screen.
Item
Machine ID
Description
Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Fax Number
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Sets the date and time.
Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and
24 hr.
240
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the
memory. The machine overwrites the data with different
patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery.
Sets the time that the machine remembers previously
used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine
restores the default copy settings.
System Timeout
•
Manual: When printing, copying, scanning, and
faxing, the machine temporarily uses memory space.
For security reasons, you can set the machine to
manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If
you want to secure memory space, you can manually
overwrite secure non-volatile memory.
Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing
the last page of a print job that does not end with a
command to print the page.
Job Timeout
ImageOverwrite
When this option is "On", you can wake up the machine
from the power saving mode with the following actions:
•
Automatic: When a job is completed, there are
temporal images left in the memory. For security
reasons, you can set the machine to automatically
overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to
secure memory space, you can set the machine to
automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory
•
•
•
•
•
pressing any button on the control panel
loading paper in a tray
opening or closing the front cover
pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in
connecting a USB memory device (only for the models
that support USB memory devices)
Wakeup Event
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control
panel display.
Language
Sets the machine’s default mode among fax mode, copy
mode, or scan mode.
If the machine does not have the touch screen,
you can wake up the machine from the power
saving mode by pressing any button on the
control panel regardless of this option’s setting.
Default Mode
Default Paper Size
You can set the default paper size to use.
Sets how long the machine waits before going to power
save mode.
Power Save
When the machine does not receive data for an extended
period of time, power consumption is automatically
lowered.
241
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match the
paper settings.
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match. For
example, if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same
size paper, the machine automatically prints from tray 2
after the tray 1 runs out of paper.
•
0 Sec: This option allows you to continue printing
when the paper size you have set is mismatched with
the paper in the tray.
Auto Tray Switch
Auto Continue
•
30 Sec: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message
will display. The machine waits for about 30 second,
then automatically clear the message and continue
printing.
This option does not appear if you selected Auto
for Paper Source from printer driver.
•
Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits
until you insert the correct paper.
Automatically substitutes the printer driver’s paper size
to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4.
Paper Substitution For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set
the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine
prints on A4 paper and vice versa.
Altitude
Adjustment
Optimize print quality according to the machine’s
altitude.
Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the
environment.
Humidity
The printer detects the printing data from computer
whether a page is empty or not. You can set to print or
skip the blank page.
Skip Blank Pages
Allows you to append the required carriage return to
each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users.
Auto CR
Decides to use or not use the Auto tray switch feature.
Firmware Version
Shows the product’s firmware version.
If you set tray 1 to On, for example, then tray 1 is
excluded during tray switching.
Tray Protection
This setting works for copy or print jobs: It
doesn't affect fax jobs.
242
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
Allows you to select the PDF type when saving the data as
a PDF file.
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You
can clear the empty message.
CLR Empty Msg
•
•
Standard: Saves the data as a regular PDF.
Helpful information for what to do if you encounter an
error.
Troubleshooting
PDF/A: Saves the data as a PDF that has the necessary
information to render itself in any environment.
Allows you to save print resources and enables eco-
friendly printing.
PDF Type
PDF/A file must be self-contained: it cannot rely
on another application to render fonts, open
hyperlinks, or execute scripts, audio files, or video
files.
•
Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode
on or off.
Eco Settings
On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with
password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode
on/off, the user needs to enter the password.
You can apply the stamp feature.
•
Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page
number, device information, or user ID, to the copy
output.
•
Select Template: Selects the eco template set from
the SyncThru™ Web Service.
Stamp
•
•
Opacity: You can select the transparency.
You can reduce the amount of water vapor produced
during printing.
Position: Sets the position.
Address Book
Import Setting
Views or prints the phone book or email address list.
Vapor Mode
•
•
•
Off: Disables vapor mode.
On: Enables vapor mode.
Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the
machine.
Auto: Automatically enters vapor mode according to
time in high humidity environments.
Exports data stored on a USB memory stick to the
machine.
Export Setting
243
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Description
Turns power off automatically when the machine has
been in power save mode for the length of time set in
Auto Power Off > On > Timeout.
•
•
Auto Color Reg.
The machine virtually prints certain patterned image to
calibrate the color printing position. This feature
enhances the colored image sharper and clearer, which
means the machine prints the colored image on the
paper more like the one in the monitor.
Auto Color
Registration
•
To turn the machine on again, press the
(Power/Wakeup) button on the control panel
(make sure the main power switch is on).
Auto Power Off
If you have moved the machine, it is strongly
recommended to operate this menu manually.
•
•
If you run the printer driver or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager, the time automatically
extends.
Tone Adjustment
•
Default: The machine automatically calibrate the
toner density of machine for the best possible color
print quality. If you select Off, the machine is calibrated
by the factory default toner density.
While the machine is connected to the
network or working on a print job, Auto
Power Off feature doesn't work.
•
•
Auto Tone Adjustment (Auto Tone Adj.): Allows you
to automatically adjust tone for the best possible print
quality.
•
•
Image
Management
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color
registration, color density, etc.
Calibration ID Sensor (Cal. ID Sensor): Automatically
calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner
or machine parts and uses this information to adjust
the color density. For example, if the yellow toner is
running out, the machine calculates the amount of
remaining yellow toner and adjusts color density so
the printouts are fine.
Image Mar.
Custom Color
This menu allows you to adjust contrast, color by color.
•
•
Default: Optimizes colors automatically.
Print Density: Allows you to manually adjust the color
density for print. Adjust the print density.
It is recommended to use the Default setting for best
color quality.
244
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
10
Item
Description
Paper setup
•
•
•
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
Duplex Margin: Sets the margin for double-sided
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
printing.
Binding: When printing on both sides of the paper,
side A's margin closest to the binding will be the same
as side B's margin closest to the binding. Likewise, the
sides' margins farthest from the binding will be the
same.
Common Margin
To change the menu options:
•
•
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
•
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Paper Setup on the touch
screen.
Sets the paper margins for emulation print page.
Emulation Margin
•
•
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Item
Paper Size
Description
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes,
according to your requirements.
Sets the paper margins in multi-purpose tray.
•
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
Paper Type
Paper Source
Margin
Chooses the type of the paper for each tray.
Selects from which tray the paper is used.
Sets the margins for the document.
MP Tray
•
Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided
printing.
•
•
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Manual Feeder
Sets the paper margins in manual feeder tray.
245
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Key Sound
Description
Activates the tray confirmation message. If you open and
close a tray, a window asking you whether to set the
paper size and type for the tray just opened appears.
Turns the key sound on or off. A tone sounds each time a
key is pressed if this option is on.
Tray Confirm
Turns the alarm sound on or off. An alarm tone sounds
when an error occurs or fax communication ends if this
option is on.
Sets the paper margins for the paper trays.
Alarm Sound
•
Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line
through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone.
With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker
is on until the remote machine answers.
<Tray X>
•
Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided
printing.
•
•
Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook
Dial. You can adjust the speaker volume only
when the telephone line is connected.
11
Sound / Volume
Speaker Volume
a Press
(fax) on the control panel.
b Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from
the speaker.
c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
want.
d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and
return to ready mode.
To change the menu options:
•
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Sound on the control panel.
Adjusts the dial tone volume. You can select different
levels.
Dial Tone volume
Ring Volume
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Initial Setup > Sound/Volume
on the touch screen.
Adjusts the ring volume. You can select different levels.
246
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
12
Item
Description
Report
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
sent.
Fax Sent
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
received.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Fax Received
Email Sent
Prints information on the emails you have
recently sent.
To change the menu options:
•
•
Fax Scheduled Jobs
Fax Schedule Jobs
Prints the document list currently stored for
delayed faxes along with the starting time and
type of each operation.
•
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Reports on the touch screen.
Prints information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
Network Configuration
Item
Configuration
Description
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Prints the PCL font list.
Prints a report on the machine's overall
configuration.
Prints the PS/PS3 font list.
Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the
total number of pages printed.
Usage Counter
Fax Options
•
•
Supplies Info.
Prints supplies’ information page.
Supplies Information
Prints the information of a fax reports.
Prints all of the email addresses currently stored
in the machine’s memory.
Address Book
This is used only available when Job Accounting
is enabled from the SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service. You can print a report of printout counts
for each user.
Account
Prints the demo page to check whether your
machine is printing properly or not.
Demo Page
Fax Send Confirmation
Prints fax confirmation result.
247
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
13
Item
Description
Maintenance
If you use a machine in a humid area, or you are using the
damp print media caused by a high humidity, the print-
outs on the output tray may be curled and may not be
stacked properly. In this case, you can set the machine to
use this function to let print-outs stacked firmly. But,
using this function will make the print speed slow.
Paper Stacking
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Ram Disk
Enables/disables Ram disk to manage jobs.
To change the menu options:
14
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel.
Job manage
Item
Description
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You
can clear the empty message.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
CLR Empty Msg.
Supplies Life
Image Mar.
Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color
registration, color density, etc.
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Job Manage on the control panel.
Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty
TonerLow Alert
Item
Description
Shows the machine’s serial number. When you call for
service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you
can find this.
Active Job
Stored Job
Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed.
Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk.
Serial Number
248
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
16
Item
Description
Shows the print job lists that are secured on the disk.
Document box
Secured Job
15
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Address book setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Press Document Box > Next > select the menu item you want on the touch
screen.
Option
Description
•
Press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book on the touch screen.
System Boxes
Stores the printing data or prints the secure page.
•
Stored Print: Prints out the stored data without
entering password.
Option
PhoneBook
Description
Adds, views, prints or deletes the phone book list. You
also can create a group.
•
Secured Print: Prints out the stored data with
entering password.
Adds, views, prints or deletes the email list. You also can
create a group.
Shared Folder
Show the shared folders on your network and save your
jobs there.
Email
Print
Prints the address book.
Reset
Resets the current address book.
249
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
17
Option
Description
Network setup
Selects the appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment (see
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
TCP/IP (IPv4)
There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are
not sure, leave as is, or consult the network
administrator.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings >
Network Settings (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 310).
Selects this option to use the network environment
TCP/IP (IPv6)
Configure the network transmission speed.
•
•
Press
(Menu)> System Setup> Network on the control panel,
Ethernet Speed
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup on the touch
screen.
You can selects the user authentication for network
communication. For detailed information consult the
network administrator.
802.1x
Wireless
Selects this option to use the wireless network.
250
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Option
Description
Option
Description
Reverts the network settings to the default values.
You can configure the WINS server. WINS(Windows
Internet Name Service) is used in the Windows operating
system.
Clear Settings
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
WINS
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Network
Configuration
This list shows information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
You can set SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol). Administrator’s can use SNMP to monitor and
manage machines on the network.
•
•
Net. Activate
You can sets whether to use Ethernet on or off.
SNMP V1/V2
SNTP
Ethernet Activate
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
You can set SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
settings. SNTP synchronizes the clocks of the computer
systems through the Internet (NTP) so there would not be
a time difference when exchanging data.
You can sets whether to use SyncThru™ Web Service or
not.
You can set UPNP protocol.
Http Activate
UPnP(SSDP)
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
You can set mDNS (Multicast Domain Name System)
settings.
MDNS
SetIP
You can set SetIP settings.
251
3. Useful Setting Menus
System setup
Option
Description
You can configure SLP (Service Location Protocol)
settings. This protocol allows host applications to find
services in a local area network without prior
configuration.
SLP
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
252
3. Useful Setting Menus
Admin setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
Press Setup > Admin Setup > Next on the touch screen.
Item
Description
You can control user access to a machine. You can assign
different levels of permissions to use the machine to each
user.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™
Web Service. Open the Web browser from your
networked computer and type the IP address of your
machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click
the Security tab > User Access Control (see
User Access
Control
Change Admin.
Password
Changes the machine’s password for accessing the Admin
Setup.
Firmware
Upgrade
To upgrade the latest firmware, turn this option "On" and
then download the firmware file.
Stamp
Sets the stamp feature to access the Admin Setup menu.
253
3. Useful Setting Menus
Eco
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
Press Eco > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
•
Item
Description
Select eco mode and change on/off or on-forced
option.
Eco-On
Sets eco-related settings and change default settings.
•
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the
Settings
default mode.
•
Feature Configuration: Select the Default mode or
Custom mode.
254
3. Useful Setting Menus
Direct USB
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
To change the menu options:
•
Press Direct USB > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item
Print From
Description
Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file
to print.
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals
and save the scanned image to a USB device.
Scan to USB
Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file
to delete. You can format the USB device.
File Manage
Show Space
Shows the remaining space.
255
3. Useful Setting Menus
4. Special Features
This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features.
•
•
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
Altitude adjustment
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the
height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you
on how to set your machine for the best print quality.
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer
Manager program.
•
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.
>
4,000 m
(13,123 ft)
1
3,000 m
(9,842 ft)
•
•
If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via
SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page
2
2,000 m
(6,561 ft)
3
You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine’s
1,000 m
(3,280 ft)
4
0
1
2
3
4
High 3
High 2
High 1
Normal
257
4. Special Features
Storing email address
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB or FTP and set
the information.
You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
Click Apply.
6
If you make a group,
1 Click Address Book > Group > Add Group.
2 Select the Speed No. and enter Group Name.
1
Storing on your machine
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add
individual(s) after this group is created.
3 Click Apply.
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up email
address using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
2
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
3
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
Click Address Book > Individual > Add.
4
5
Select the Speed No. and enter e-mail address and fax number.
258
4. Special Features
Storing email address
2
Searching for an email address
Searching sequentially through memory
Select
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
1
2
address group > All on the control panel.
Or select Scan to >
address group > All on the control panel.
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Email >
View List > Individual or Group on the touch screen.
Search through the entire memory in index (numerical) order, and select
the name and address you want.
Searching with a particular first letter
Select
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
1
address group > ID on the control panel.
Or select Scan to >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > ID on the control panel.
Enter the first few letters of the name you want.
2
3
Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears.
259
4. Special Features
Entering various characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For
example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email
addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.
Key
1
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters
@ / . ’ 1
2
A B C a b c 2
D E F d e f 3
G H I g h i 4
J K L j k l 5
3
3
Entering alphanumeric characters
4
5
Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to
enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display
shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6. To find the letter that you
6
M N O m n o 6
7
P Q R S p q r s 7
T U V t u v 8
W X Y Z w x y z 9
& + - , 0
8
9
•
•
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.
0
To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or up/down arrow
button.
*
* % ^ _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ]
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
4
#
# = | ? " : { } < > ;
Keypad letters and numbers
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
•
•
Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you
are doing.
260
4. Special Features
Setting up the fax address book
Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
4
5
This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/CLX-626xND Series (see
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
mode.
You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
6
Using speed dial numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax,
enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want.
5
Registering a speed dial number
•
For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the
corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2
seconds.
Select
the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
•
•
For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)
and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.
Book > View List > Individual >
(options) > Add on the touch
screen.
You can print the address book list by selecting
(fax) >
Enter a speed dial number and press OK.
(Address Book) > Print.
2
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Address Book on
the touch screen.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
number, press
(Back).
Enter the name you want and press OK.
3
261
4. Special Features
Setting up the fax address book
7
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
number, press (Back).
Editing speed dial numbers
Select
(fax) >
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
1
the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Individual on the touch screen.
Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial’s name to put in
the group.
3
Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.
Change the name and press OK.
Select the name and number you want and press OK.
Select Yes when Add? appears.
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
7
Change the fax number and press OK.
Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
When you have finished, select No when Another No.? appears and
press OK.
mode.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
8
8
Registering a group dial number
Select
the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next >Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Group>
(options) > Add on the touch
screen.
Enter a group dial number and press OK.
2
262
4. Special Features
Setting up the fax address book
9
10
Editing group dial numbers
Searching address book for an entry
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from
A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name
associated with the number.
Select
the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Group on the touch screen.
Select ct
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Search & Dial > Speed Dial
1
Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.
or Group Dial on the control panel.
2
3
Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears.
Enter All or ID and press OK.
2
3
Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?
Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter
you want to search.
appears.
Press OK to add or delete the number.
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,” press the 6 button,
which is labeled with “MNO.”
4
5
6
7
Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers.
Select No at the Another No.? and press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.
4
11
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Printing address book
mode.
You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.
263
4. Special Features
Setting up the fax address book
Select ct
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Print on the control panel.
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Address Book on
the touch screen.
Press OK.
2
The machine begins printing.
264
4. Special Features
Registering authorized users
Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, Confirm Password, E-mail
Address, and Fax Number.
9
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s)
after this group is created.
To send a scanned image, copy image, or fax data through email or via network
server safely, you must register account information of authorized users to your
local machine using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Click Apply.
10
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
2
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
3
•
•
ID: admin
Password: sec00000
Click Security > User Access Control > Authentication.
4
5
Select Basic Authentication in the Authentication Mode, and select
Local Authentication in the AA Method, and click.
Click Apply.
6
7
8
Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window.
Click User Profile > Add.
265
4. Special Features
Printing features
•
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing
Preferences.
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
13
Setting your machine as a default machine
12
Changing the default print settings
Click the Windows Start menu.
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
1
2
Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
Select your machine.
2
3
Right-click on your machine.
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
3
4
Select Printing preferences.
4
If Printing preferences has a ▶, you can select other printer drivers
connected to the selected printer.
If Printing preferences has a ▶, you can select other printer drivers
connected to the selected printer.
Change the settings on each tab.
5
Click OK.
6
266
4. Special Features
Printing features
14
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.
1
Using advanced print features
XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format.
•
•
The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or
higher.
•
•
Install optional memory when an XPS job does not print because the
printer is out of memory.
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the
software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For windows, select the printer XPS driver in the Select Software to
Install window.
Click Print.
2
3
Printing to a file (PRN)
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
For example, c:\Temp\file name.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My
Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are
using.
267
4. Special Features
Printing features
Understanding special printer features
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print
settings. The machine name, that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use.
•
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"
Item
Description
Multiple Pages per
Side
Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
268
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets
together to form one poster-size document.
Poster Printing
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab
to make it easier to paste the sheets together.
Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce
a booklet.
a
Booklet Printing
•
•
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
9
8
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what
paper sizes are available.
•
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without
mark).
or
•
•
Double-sided
Printing
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.
Double-sided
•
•
You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper
Printing (Manual)
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of
the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.
•
Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the Double-sided Printing (Manual) option.
269
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
•
•
Double-sided
Printing
•
Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the machine.
This option is available only when you use the PCL/XPS printer driver.
Double-sided
•
•
None: Disables this feature.
Printing (Manual)
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.
•
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
•
Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing. This option is not available when you
use Double-sided Printing (Manual).
Paper Options
Watermark
Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the
document.
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
270
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.
Watermark
(Creating a
watermark)
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options.
d Click Update to save the changes.
Watermark
(Editing a watermark)
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Watermark
(Deleting a
watermark)
This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver (see "Software" on page 5).
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document.
Overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
•
•
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.
271
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
a To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.
c In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
d In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is
C:\Formover).
e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
Overlay
(Creating a new page
overlay)
f
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.
a Click the Advanced tab.
b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you
want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay
List box.
Overlay
(Using a page overlay)
d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a
document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
a In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
b Select Edit in the Text drop down list.
c Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
d Click Delete.
Overlay
(Deleting a page
overlay)
e When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
f
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
272
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
•
•
•
•
This feature is available only if you have installed the mass storage device or optional memory (see "Variety feature" on page 8).
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Without installing the mass storage device in the machine, the Ram Disk feature provides only 3 options: Normal, Proof, and
Confidential.
•
Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory.
-
-
-
-
-
-
Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory.
Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies later.
Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print.
Store: Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing.
b
Print Mode
Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time.
Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If you select this setting, the printer spools the document into the
mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue, decreasing the computer’s work load.
-
Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time.
•
•
Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel.
User ID: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel. The user name automatically appears as the
user name that you use to log on Windows.
•
•
Enter Password: If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured, you have to enter the password for the document
box. This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel.
Confirm Password: Re-enter the password to confirm it.
273
4. Special Features
Printing features
Item
Description
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
•
•
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission can start a print job.
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group permission can start a print job.
•
•
Click the question mark(
) from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about.
Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru™ Web Service.
Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects the printing information even though the data is snatched on
a network.
c
Job Encryption
Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the mass storage device is installed. The mass storage device is used to decrypt the printing
data (see "Variety feature" on page 8).
a. This option is not available when you use XPS driver.
b. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series only.
c. CLX-626xFW Series only.
274
4. Special Features
Printing features
15
•
•
Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility
program depends on how the PDF file was created.
Using Direct Printing Utility
The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below.
For higher versions, you must open the file to print it.
•
•
Available for Windows OS users only.
Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or
optional goods (see "Software" on page 5).
Printing
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.
What is Direct Printing Utility?
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Direct Printing Utility > Direct Printing Utility.
1
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your
machine to print without having to opening the file.
The Direct Printing Utility window appears.
To install this program:
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click
Browse.
2
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
Select the file you wish to print and click Open.
3
The file is added in the Select Files section.
•
Optional memory or mass storage device should be installed on your
machine, to print files using this program. (see "Variety feature" on page
8).
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
4
•
•
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing
restriction feature and retry printing.
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
5
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate
the password feature, and retry printing.
275
4. Special Features
Printing features
Open the document to print.
Using the right-click menu
1
2
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some
applications).
Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing.
1
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added.
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.
3
Select the machine to use.
2
Open the File menu and click Print.
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
Click Print.
Customize the machine settings.
4
5
6
3
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
4
16
Mac printing
Changing printer settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties
window is similar to the following.
Printing a document
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver settings in each
application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:
Printing multiple pages on one sheet
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.
276
4. Special Features
Printing features
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.
Select the other options to use.
1
3
4
5
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
on one sheet of paper.
2
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
Select the other options to use.
3
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper
when you are printing more than 1 copy.
Click Print.
4
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet
of paper.
Using help
Printing on both sides of the paper
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information
about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page 8).
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding
your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:
•
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book
binding.
•
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.
1
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
2
277
4. Special Features
Printing features
17
Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed
at the top of the window.
4
Linux printing
•
General: Changes the paper size, the paper type, and the
orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds
start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing.
Printing from applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such
application.
•
•
•
Text: Specifies the page margins and set the text options, such as
spacing or columns.
Graphics: Sets image options that are used when printing image
files, such as color options, image size, or image position.
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu
1
Advanced: Sets the print resolution, paper source, and destination.
Select Print directly using lpr.
2
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
5
6
7
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the
3
printer list and click Properties.
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your
print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
278
4. Special Features
Printing features
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
Printing files
1
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard
CUPS, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you
to do that, but the driver’s package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much
more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.
2
3
The Printer Properties window appears.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
To print any document file:
•
•
General: Allows you to change the printer location and name. The
name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers
configuration.
Enter lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press
Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
1
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click
Open.
Connection: Allows you to view or select another port. If you change
the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you
must re-configure the machine port in this tab.
•
•
Driver: Allows you to view or select another machine driver. By
clicking Options, you can set the default device options.
In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change
the print job properties.
2
Jobs: Shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the
selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see
previous jobs on the job list.
Click OK to start printing.
3
•
Classes: Shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class
to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class
to remove the machine from the selected class.
Configuring Printer Properties
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration,
you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.
4
279
4. Special Features
Printing features
18
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,
press Properties.
Unix printing
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Features by models" on
Press OK to start the print job.
5
Changing the machine settings
The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various
print options in printer Properties.
Proceeding the print job
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, or PS files to print.
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A” for Apply,
and “C” for Cancel.
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.
1
For example, if you are printing “document1”
General tab
printui document1
•
•
•
Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according
to your requirements.
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the
user can select various print options.
Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box
are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.
Select a printer that has been already added.
2
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto
Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.
Selection.
3
•
•
Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.
4
Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.
280
4. Special Features
Printing features
Printer-Specific Settings tab
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing.
Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various
settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.
•
•
Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.
Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline,
Double-line hairline)
Image tab
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your
document.
Text tab
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
Margins tab
•
Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not
enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in
the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size
selected.
•
Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.
281
4. Special Features
Scan features
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network.
The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:
•
•
•
•
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned
data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending
on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan
at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.
•
TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning an
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the
network connection (see "Scanning from image editing program" on page
286).
•
•
Samsung Scan Assistant/Samsung Easy Document Creator: You can use
this program to scan images or documents.
19
Basic scanning method
-
-
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your
computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable
•
•
•
USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto
an USB memory device.
Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment (See
FTP/SMB: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP/SMB server (see
282
4. Special Features
Scan features
20
21
Setting the scan settings in the computer
Scanning from network connected machine
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be able
to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD,
since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver
1
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
Select Scan to PC Settings menu.
3
Select the option you want.
4
Select
(Scan) > Scan To PC > Network PC on the control panel.
•
•
•
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on
the device.
2
Or select Scan > Network PC on the touch screen.
Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device
settings.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if
necessary.
Press Save > OK.
3
5
283
4. Special Features
Scan features
Setting up an email account
•
ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer
Manager > Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.
Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
•
Select Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).
Printer Manager >
Settings.
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC
2
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
3
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
Select the option you want and press OK.
4
4
5
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
authentication.
Scanning begins.
5
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
6
Press Apply.
7
•
•
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a
check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication.
22
Scanning to email
Enter the IP address and port number.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
284
4. Special Features
Scan features
23
Scanning and sending an email
Scanning to FTP/SMB server
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
Select
(scan) > Scan To Email on the control panel.
2
Or select Scan > Send Email on the touch screen.
Setting up an FTP/SMB server
Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru™ Web
3
4
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
1
Enter the sender’s and recipient’s email address.
Select Address Book > Individual > Add.
2
You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self
option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-mail on SyncThru™ Web Service.
Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB.
3
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
4
Enter an email subject and press OK.
5
6
7
8
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
5
Select the file format to scan, and press OK.
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.
Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits the access
of unauthorized people.
6
Enter the login name and password.
7
Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain,
otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB
server.
8
285
4. Special Features
Scan features
24
Enter the path for saving the scanned image.
9
Scanning from image editing program
•
•
•
The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root.
The folder properties need to be setup as a share.
You can scan and import documents at the image editing software such as
Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below
to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder.
Press Apply.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
10
1
Scanning and sending to FTP/SMB server
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
1
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
3
2
Click File > Import, and select the scanner device.
4
Set the scan options.
Select
(scan) > Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP on the control panel.
5
3
Or select Scan > SMB or FTP on the touch screen.
Scan and save your scanned image.
6
Select a server and scan format you want.
4
5
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the
specified server.
286
4. Special Features
Scan features
25
Scan and save your scanned image.
7
Scanning using the WIA driver
26
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft
Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN
driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using
additional software:
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assistant
•
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
For Windows, you need to download Scan Assistant from the Samsung
your product > Support or Downloads).
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port.
For Mac, open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung
Scan Assistant.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
•
For Windows, you can use the OCR (Optical Character Reader) feature
from Samsung Scan Assistant program.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and
install it.
1
2
3
Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
3
Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
4
New Scan application appears.
5
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.
Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers, and start Samsung
Scan Assistant.
6
4
287
4. Special Features
Scan features
Select the option you want.
4
5
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window and click on
Scan and save your scanned image.
any option you want to know about.
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest
version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
Set the scan options.
5
Click Scan.
6
27
Scanning from network connected machine
Mac scanning
Network or wireless model only (see "Features by models" on page 5).
Scanning from USB connected machine
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
2
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
3
According to OS, follow steps below.
4
•
For 10.4
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
-
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use
TWAIN software checkbox is checked.
288
4. Special Features
Scan features
28
-
Click Connect.
Linux scanning
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port,
or If TWAIN UI appears, click Change Port.. from the Preference
tab and select a new port.
Scanning
•
For 10.5
-
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
1
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your
machine in Bonjour Devices.
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
2
3
-
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps
above.
Click the
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.
•
For 10.6 -10.7, select your device below SHARED.
Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.
5
6
•
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the
latest version. Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X 10.4.7 or
higher.
•
•
For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.
You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
289
4. Special Features
Scan features
Select the scanner on the list.
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the
Preview Pane.
4
8
Click Properties.
5
Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview
Pane.
9
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
6
Select the option you want.
10
11
Scan and save your scanned image.
From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.
7
For later use, you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type
drop-down list.
290
4. Special Features
Scan features
Editing an image with Image Manager
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools
to edit your scanned image.
291
4. Special Features
Fax features
30
•
Redialing the fax number
•
This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/CLX-626xND Series (see
Press
(Redial/Pause) button on the control panel.
1
2
Select the fax number you want.
29
Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.
Automatic redialing
When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine
automatically begins to send.
3
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send
a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on
the country's factory default setting.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,
select No when Another Page? appears.
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press
(Start) button to redial the
31
number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press
(Stop or
Confirming a transmission
Stop/Clear) button.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts.
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine
beeps and returns to ready mode.
Press
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears
1
on the display. If you receive an error message, press
to clear the message and try to send the fax again.
(Stop or Stop/Clear)
Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want.
2
3
Select the option you want.
292
4. Special Features
Fax features
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option
5
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
time sending a fax is completed. Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup
> Sending > Fax Confirmation on the control panel.
32
Sending a fax in the computer
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer
driver.
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window and click on
any option you want to know about.
Open the document to be sent.
1
Select Print from the File menu.
2
Click Send.
6
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window
3
Click Print or OK.
4
293
4. Special Features
Fax features
33
Enter the job name and the time.
8
9
Delaying a fax transmission
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time
on the following day.
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
1
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.
Press
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.
Press (Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel.
(fax) on the control panel.
2
3
4
You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Fax Scheduled Jobs on the
control panel.
Or select Fax > Delayed Send on the touch screen.
Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
5
6
7
Canceling a reserved fax job
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the control
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat
steps 5.
1
panel.
Select the fax job you want and press OK.
2
3
•
•
You can add up to 10 destinations.
Press OK when Yes highlights.
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group
dial numbers anymore.
The selected fax is deleted from memory.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.
4
294
4. Special Features
Fax features
34
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and
press OK.
3
4
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,
this feature may be useful.
mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
35
•
•
When you forward a fax by an email, you must first set the mail server and
IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web
Forwarding a received fax
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,
this feature may be useful.
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in
grayscale.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
1
2
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale.
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Send Forward > Forward
to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Send Forward
> Forward to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch
screen.
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
295
4. Special Features
Fax features
36
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
1
Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or Forward to
Sending faxes on both sides of paper
Server on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive
Forward > Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or
Forward to Server on the touch screen.
•
•
This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
•
•
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Variety feature" on page 8).
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward&Print.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
1
2
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and
press OK.
2
Press
(fax) > Fax Feature > Duplex on the control panel.
Or select Fax > Select the menu you want > Select Duplex from the sub-
menus > on the touch screen.
Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK.
3
4
•
•
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one isde only.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the
back is rotated 180°.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the originals on the DADF. If the
machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it automatically changes
the option to 1 Sided.
296
4. Special Features
Fax features
Press OK.
•
•
•
•
Print received fax: After receiving the fax, set prints information for
the received fax.
3
37
Notify me when complete: Set to show the popup window to
notify receiving a fax.
Receiving a fax in the computer
Open with default application: After receiving the fax, open it with
default application.
•
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
None: After receiving a fax, the machine does not notify the user or
opens the application.
To use this feature, set the option on the control panel:
Press Save > OK.
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
5
Forward to PC > Forward the control panel.
38
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive
Forward > Forward to PC > Forward on the touch screen.
Changing the receive modes
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Mode
Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
1
1
2
3
4
on the control panel.
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
Select Fax to PC Settings menu.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax
Default > Common > Receive Mode on the touch screen.
Select the option you want.
2
Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings.
•
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax
•
•
•
Image Type: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF.
Save Location: Select location to save the converted faxes.
Prefix: Select prefix.
reception mode.
•
Tel: Receives a fax by pressing
(On Hook Dial) and then
(Start) button.
297
4. Special Features
Fax features
39
•
Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to your
machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine
senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to
Fax mode to receive the fax.
Receiving manually in Tel mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing
(On Hook Dial) button and then
pressing (Start) when you hear a fax tone. If your machine has a handset,
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket
you can answer calls using the handset (see "Features by models" on page 5).
on the back of your machine.
40
•
DRPD: You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on
the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine
stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
•
If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine
is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket,
your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined
number of rings.
Press OK.
3
4
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
•
•
If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the
machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering
machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.
298
4. Special Features
Fax features
41
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
Receiving faxes with an extension telephone
When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket, you
can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone,
without going to the fax machine.
Select
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive
1
Mode > DRPD on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax
Default > Common > Receive Mode > DRPD on the touch screen.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the
keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
Call your fax number from another telephone.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you
want.
2
3
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine
requires several rings to learn the pattern.
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.
While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket, copy
and scan features are not available.
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2.
4
42
•
•
DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect
the machine to another telephone line.
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the
machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different
number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.
This setting may not be available depending on your country. Distinctive Ring is
a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone
line to answer several different telephone numbers. This feature is often used by
answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need
to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.
299
4. Special Features
Fax features
43
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.
3
Receiving in secure receiving mode
44
Printing faxes on both sides of the paper
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
•
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes
go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes with entering the password.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
1
2
To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > On on the control panel.
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Duplex Print
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive on
the touch screen.
on the control panel.
•
•
Off: Prints in Normal mode.
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.
Printing received faxes
Select
on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > Print
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive
> Print on the touch screen.
Enter a four-digit password and press OK.
2
300
4. Special Features
Fax features
•
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.
2
3
5
Press OK.
3
4
Press
(Stop/Clear)button to return to ready mode.
45
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing,
your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be
processed at the same time.
301
4. Special Features
Using shared folder features
47
This feature allows you to use the machine’s memory as a shared folder. The
advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder
through your computer’s window.
Using the shared folder
You can use the shared folder in the same way exactly like the normal computer.
Create, edit and delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You also
store the scanned data in the shared folder. You can directly print files stored on
a the shared folder. You can print TIFF, JPEG and PRN files.
•
•
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device
The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user’ s
access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users.
46
Creating a shared folder
Open the Windows Explore window from the computer.
1
Enter the printer’s \\[ip address] (example: \\169.254.133.42) in
the address field, and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
Create a new folder under nfsroot directory.
3
302
4. Special Features
Using optional device features
Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list.
3
•
•
CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page
8).
48
From the printer driver
If you install the optional device, you can use advanced printing features, such
as proofing a job and printing a private job in the Print window. Check the mass
storage or RAM disk option in Device Options, then you can select the various
Click Properties or Preferences .
4
5
6
Click the each tab then select Print Mode.
Open the document you want to print.
1
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
2
Select OK.
7
49
From the control panel
If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive, you can use
these features from the
(Menu) button> System Setup > Job Manage.
303
4. Special Features
Using optional device features
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
•
Active Job: All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active
job queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job
from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.
Secured Job: You can print or delete a secured job. Shows the list of secured
jobs the user has set in the printer driver. You need to enter the user name
and password set in the printer driver.
•
•
Stored Job: You can print or delete a stored job.
File Policy: You can choose the file policy for generating file name before
you proceed with the job through optional memory. If the optional memory
already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can
rename or overwrite it.
304
4. Special Features
5. Useful Management
Tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
Easy Capture Manager
•
•
Available for Windows OS users only.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 5).
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key. Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited.
306
5. Useful Management Tools
Samsung Easy Color Manager
Samsung Easy Color Manager helps users do fine adjustments with 6 color tones and other properties, such as brightness, contrast, and saturation. Color tone change
can be saved as a profile and can be used from the driver or from inside of the machine.
•
•
Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 5).
Helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
307
5. Useful Management Tools
Samsung AnyWeb Print
•
•
Available for Windows OS users only.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 5).
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily, than when you use an ordinary program.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
308
5. Useful Management Tools
Easy Eco Driver
•
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 5).
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 5).
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing. To use this application, Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job
checkbox in the printer properties should be checked.
Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts, changing fonts, and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset.
How to use:
1
2
Open a document to print.
Print the document.
A preview window appears.
3
4
Select the options you want to apply to the document.
You can see the preview of the applied features.
Click Print.
309
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
1
•
•
•
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
2
SyncThru™ Web Service explanation in this user’s guide may differ from
your machine depending on its options or models.
•
•
ID: admin
Network model only (see "Software" on page 5).
Password: sec00000
2
1
SyncThru™ Web Service overview
Accessing SyncThru™ Web Service
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
1
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
2
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Information tab
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an
administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but
you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab.
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check
things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an
error report.
•
Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their
severity.
•
Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in
the cartridge.
310
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
•
Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and
duplex.
•
User Access Control: Classifies users into several groups according to each
user’s role. Each user’s authorization, authentication and accounting will be
controlled by the group’s role definition.
•
•
•
Current Settings: Shows the machine’s and network’s information.
•
System Log: The System Log contains settings related to logs of device
events.
Security Information: Shows the machine’s security information.
Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail
address, and font reports.
CLX-626xFW Series only.
Settings tab
-
-
Log Configuration: The Log Configuration section contains settings
related to saving logs.
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
Log Viewer: The Log Viewer section contains options to view logs
stored locally on the device.
•
•
Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine.
Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets
options such as TCP/IP and network protocols.
Maintenance tab
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.
Security tab
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to
log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
•
•
•
Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machine’s firmware.
Contact Information: Shows the contact information.
•
System Security: Sets the system administrator’s information and also
Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check
information.
enables or disables machine features.
•
Network Security: Sets settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x,
and Authentication servers.
•
License Management: License Management provides settings Installed
applications and application licenses.
311
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
•
Cloning: You can import or export (transfer) various settings (machine
setting, network information, address book, etc.) between devices that have
the Cloning feature in SyncThru™ Web Service.
If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings >
Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network
environment before setting e-mail notification.
3
E-mail notification setup
Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification.
4
5
Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By
setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP
server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine
error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be
used more frequently by a machine administrator.
Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items
you want to receive an alert for.
Click Apply.
6
If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that
case, contact the a network administrator.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
4
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
1
Setting the system administrator’s information
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
2
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification.
3
312
5. Useful Management Tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
1
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
2
From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator
3
Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email
address.
4
Click Apply.
5
313
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using.
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These
documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a
student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom
sharing scanned pictures from last year’s birthday party, Easy Document Creator
will provide you with the necessary tools.
•
•
Availabe for Windows OS users only.
Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator.
•
Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you
install the machine software.
5
Understanding Samsung Easy Document Creator
To open the program:
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
Easy Document Creator > Samsung Easy Document Creator.
Click the information button to see the program’s version
information.
The Samsung Easy Document Creator interface is comprised of various basic
sections as described in the table that follows:
(Information)
1
Click the help button to get the information of any option
you want to use.
(Help)
314
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Quick Scan
Automatically scans with the settings provided in
Configuration. You can pre-set the options such as image
type, document size, resolution, or file type (see "Quick
SNS Upload
Provides an easy and quick way to upload files to a variety
of social networking sites (SNS). Scan an image directly or
select an existing image to upload to Facebook, Flickr,
Picasa, Google Docs, or Twitter (see "Scanning to a Social
2
Scan
Provides more in-depth options for scanning documents
on a one-by-one basis (see "Scanning" on page 316).
4
SNS Upload will only be available after
®
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 has
Text Converting will only be available after
installing the optical character recognition (OCR)
software proivided in a separate installation file.
been installed (http://www.microsoft.com/
download/en/details.aspx?id=22) and Windows
XP or higher and Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher are
required
•
•
•
•
•
Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or mulitple
3
pictures.
E-Book
Conversion
Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as one
e-book or convert existing files into an e-book format
Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents
with text or text and images.
5
6
Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that
need to be saved in an editable text format.
Send Fax
Provides the ability to directly fax a document from Easy
Document Creator if the Samsung Network PC Fax driver
is installed (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page
293).
Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the
flatbed scanner.
Favorites: User-created favorites for frequently-used
scan settings.
If the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is not
installed, this will be grayed out.
7
8
Configuration
Device Name
Provides the options for a Common and Quick Scan.
Shows the scanning/faxing device ready to use.
315
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview
image.
Search
If you cannot see any device ready to use, click this button
to find a device.
5
Select to Save to Location, Send to E-mail, or Send to SNS.
9
6
7
Click Search Now to automatically search for all
devices to which you have access.
Click on Save (Saving a Scan), Send ( E-mailing a Scan), or Share
(Uploading).
If there is room on the document glass, more than one item can be scanned
Click the Help ( ) button from the upper-right corner of the window and
at the same time. Use the
tool to make multiple selection areas.
click on any option you want to know about.
6
Quick Scanning
Using features
Configuring Quick Scan
Scanning
To set up the Quick Scan options:
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
Click Configuration from the home screen.
Click on Default to use the default settings, or select your own options.
Click Apply to save changes.
1
2
3
Click Scan from the home screen.
2
3
4
Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start.
Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options).
316
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Using Quick Scan
Upload Existing File
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
Click SNS Upload from the home screen.
1
1
2
3
4
5
Click Existing File to SNS > Start.
Select the site and click Add Image to find the file to upload.
Select a social networking site to send the image and click Next.
Follow the instructions in each social networking site.
Click Quick Scan from the home screen.
Select a save location for the scanned images.
Click Save to save the image.
2
3
4
If there are some problems on accessing or uploading to each SNS site due
to a network environment issue, it's needed to check security limitations
established in your network with network administrator. To guarantee
correct functioning of SNS upload in Samsung Easy Document Creator,
unrestricted network environment is needed for HTTPS communication.
Click Scan More to scan another image with the same settings.
Scanning to a Social Networking Site
Scan Directly
Converting to an E-Book
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
1
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
Scan Directly
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
Click SNS Upload from the home screen.
1
2
Click Scan to SNS > Start.
3
Click E-Book Conversion from the home screen.
Click Scan.
2
4
317
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Click Scan to E-Book > Start.
Click Send Fax.
3
4
4
5
Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the
.epub file, a file name, and select a save location.
Enter the fax information (recipient’s number, cover page information,
etc).
Click Save.
Click Send.
5
6
7
Convert Existing Files
Plug-ins
Click E-Book Conversion from the home screen.
1
2
3
4
Easy Document Creator will also create new plug-ins for Microsoft PowerPoint,
Word, and Excel. These new plug-ins will be in a new Easy Document Creator
menu on the applications’ menu bars: Scan to Office, Send Fax, and E-Book.
Click Existing File to E-Book > Start.
Click Add Image to find the file to convert.
Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the
.epub file, a file name, and select a save location.
Click Save.
5
Sending a Fax
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
1
Click Send Fax from the home screen.
2
3
Click add file and locate the file to fax.
318
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic
sections as described in the table that follows:
•
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
•
•
Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 5).
The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using.
For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung
machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.
8
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Printer list
The Printer List displays printers installed on your
computer and network printers added by network
discovery (Windows only).
1
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
For Mac,
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer
Manager.
319
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Printer
information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the machine’s
model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine
status.
Quick links
Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This
section also includes links to applications in the advanced
settings.
4
If you connect your machine to a network, the
SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.
2
You can view the online User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs.
You can directly open the necessary section in the
user’s guide.
Contents area
Displays information about the selected machine,
remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary
based on the machine selected. Some machines do not
have this feature.
5
6
Application
information
Includes links for changing to the advanced settings
(switching UI), refresh, preference setting, summary, help,
and about.
Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering
window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)
from online.
3
The
button is used to change the user
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window and click on
interface to the advanced settings user interface
any option you want to know about.
9
Advanced settings user interface overview
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible
for managing the network and machines.
320
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Fax to PC Settings
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected
device.
•
•
Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.
Device Settings
Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and allow
more options to be set.
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper,
layout, emulation, network, and print information.
Alert Settings (Windows only)
Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
•
•
•
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.
Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
•
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the
device.
•
•
Basic tab: Contains settings related general scan and device settings.
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Job Accounting
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting
software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.
321
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Status
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the
Icon
Mean
Normal
Description
machine status.
The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no
errors or warnings.
•
•
•
The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.
Warning
Error
The machine is in a state where an error might occur in
the future. For example, it might be in toner low status,
which may lead to toner empty status.
Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 5).
The machine has at least one error.
10
Samsung Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install
the machine software.
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
Toner Level
Option
You can view the level of toner remaining in each
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
1
2
You can set printing job alert related settings.
322
5. Useful Management Tools
Using Samsung Printer Status
Order Supplies
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from
online.
3
User’s Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide.
This button opens the Troubleshooting
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly
open the troubleshooting section in the
user’s guide.
4
5
Close
Close the window.
323
5. Useful Management Tools
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
11
The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring
machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver
Opening Unified Driver Configurator
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver Configurator
icon will automatically be created on your desktop.
1
2
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified
Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.
Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding
configuration window.
1
2
Printer Configuration
Port Configuration
324
5. Useful Management Tools
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
Printers tab
To use the on screen help, the Help or
button from the window.
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon
button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver
3
Configurator.
12
Printers configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
1
2
3
Switches to Printers configuration.
Shows all of the installed machines.
Shows the status, model name, and URI of your machine.
325
5. Useful Management Tools
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
The printer control buttons are, as follows:
Classes tab
•
•
•
•
•
•
Refresh: Renews the available machines list.
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.
Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.
Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.
Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine.
Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.
Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working
properly.
•
Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer’s properties.
1
2
Shows all of the machine classes.
Shows the status of the class and the number of machines
in the class.
•
•
•
Refresh: Renews the classes list.
Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.
Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.
326
5. Useful Management Tools
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
13
1
2
Switches to Ports configuration.
Ports configuration
Shows all of the available ports.
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each
port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has
terminated the job for any reason.
Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and
status.
3
•
•
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.
Release port: Releases the selected port.
327
5. Useful Management Tools
6. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings, refer to the
troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless
Paper feeding problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Paper jams during printing.
Paper sticks together.
Clear the paper jam.
•
•
•
•
Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.
Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper.
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.
Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed.
Paper does not feed into the machine.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.
•
•
•
•
Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
The paper keeps jamming.
•
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the
manual feeding in tray.
•
•
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris.
Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
329
6. Troubleshooting
Power and cable connecting problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine is not receiving power,
•
•
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
press it.
(Power/Wakeup) button on the control,
or the connection cable between the
computer and the machine is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.
330
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine does not
print.
The machine is not receiving power.
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
(Power/
Wakeup) button on the control, press it.
The machine is not selected as the default
machine.
Select your machine as your default machine in Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
The cover is not closed. Close the cover.
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 122).
No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the tray" on page 49).
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable between the computer and Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 23).
the machine is not connected properly.
The connection cable between the computer and If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job.
the machine is defective.
You can also try using a different machine cable.
The port setting is incorrect.
Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to
the correct one.
331
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.
Uninstall and reinstall the machine’s driver.
The machine does not
print.
The machine may be configured incorrectly.
The printer driver may be incorrectly installed.
The machine is malfunctioning.
Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a service representative.
The document size is so big that the hard disk
space of the computer is insufficient to access the
print job.
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.
The output tray is full.
Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.
The machine selects print The paper option that was selected in the
materials from the wrong Printing Preferences may be incorrect.
paper source.
For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on
A print job is extremely
slow.
The job may be very complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.
Half the page is blank.
The page orientation setting may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on
The paper size and the paper size settings do not Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.
match.
Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection
in the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on
The machine prints, but
the text is wrong,
garbled, or incomplete.
The machine cable is loose or defective.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already
printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer
that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable.
332
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The wrong printer driver was selected.
The software application is malfunctioning.
The operating system is malfunctioning.
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.
Try printing a job from another application.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again.
Pages print, but they are The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner.
Redistribute the toner, if necessary.
blank.
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.
•
•
The file may have blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Contact a service representative.
Some parts, such as the controller or the board,
may be defective.
The machine does not
print PDF files correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image
from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
The print quality of
photos is not good.
Images are not clear.
The resolution of the photo is very low.
Using damp paper can cause vapor during
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
Before printing, the
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.
machine emits vapor near printing.
the output tray.
333
6. Troubleshooting
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine does not
print special-sized paper,
such as billing paper.
Paper size and paper size setting do not match.
Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see
The printed billing paper The paper type setting does not match.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,
is curled.
334
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there
might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition
Suggested solutions
Light or faded print
•
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the
•
•
The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn
the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.
•
•
A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
108). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
The top half of the paper is
printed lighter than the rest of
the paper
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
•
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
335
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Toner specks
•
•
•
The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
Dropouts
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
•
•
•
•
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper.
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
If white spots appear on the page:
White Spots
•
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be
dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
•
The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
336
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Vertical lines
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
•
The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and
install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
•
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
108). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Black or color background
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
•
•
Change to a lighter weight paper.
Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount
of background shading.
•
•
Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 95).
Toner smear
•
•
•
Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
Check the paper type and quality.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
337
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
Vertical repetitive defects
•
•
•
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (see
Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after
a few more pages.
The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.
Background scatter
Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.
•
The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much moisture.
•
If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams
on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems.
A
Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
•
•
If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application
or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.
If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 95).
Toner particles are around bold The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
characters or pictures
•
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
•
Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging
can occur causing this copy quality problem.
338
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Misformed characters
•
If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper.
Page skew
•
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality.
Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.
Curl or wave
•
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl.
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
339
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Wrinkles or creases
•
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality.
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts are dirty
•
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
Solid color or black pages
•
•
The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
•
The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
340
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Loose toner
•
•
•
Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
Check the paper type, thickness, and quality.
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 97).
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Character voids
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:
•
•
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.
The paper may not meet paper specifications.
A
Horizontal stripes
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
•
•
The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
341
6. Troubleshooting
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Curl
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
•
•
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Change the printer’s paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see
•
An unknown image
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.
repetitively appears on a few
sheets
The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see
•
•
Loose toner
Light print or contamination
occurs
342
6. Troubleshooting
Copying problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page
71).
Smears, lines, marks, or spots
appear on copies.
•
•
If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies.
If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 112).
Copy image is skewed.
•
•
Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide.
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 108).
Blank copies print out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder.
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Image rubs off the copy easily.
•
•
Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper jams
occur.
•
Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if
necessary.
•
•
Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 146).
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge produces fewer
copies than expected before
running out of toner.
•
Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
•
•
The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.
Turn the machine off and back on.
343
6. Troubleshooting
Scanning problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The scanner does not work.
•
•
Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works.
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
•
•
Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.
Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace
the printer cable.
•
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).
The unit scans very slowly.
•
•
•
Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned
image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how
to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.
344
6. Troubleshooting
Scanning problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Message appears on your
computer screen:
•
•
•
•
•
•
There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.
The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.
Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.
The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
•
Device can’t be set to the H/W
mode you want.
•
Port is being used by another
program.
•
•
Port is disabled.
Scanner is busy receiving or
printing data. When the
current job is completed, try
again.
•
•
Invalid handle.
Scanning has failed.
345
6. Troubleshooting
Faxing problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine is not working,
there is no display, or the
buttons are not working.
•
•
•
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.
Ensure that the power is turned on.
No dial tone.
•
•
Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 23).
Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in memory Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list.
do not dial correctly.
The original does not feed into
the machine.
•
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick
or thin.
•
•
Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.
The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative (see "Available maintenance parts" on
Faxes are not received
automatically.
•
•
•
The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 297).
Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 146).
Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.
The machine does not send.
•
•
Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.
Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank
spaces or is of poor-quality.
•
•
•
•
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your machine by making a copy.
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"
346
6. Troubleshooting
Faxing problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.
Some of the words on an
incoming fax are stretched.
There are lines on the originals Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 112).
you sent.
The machine dials a number,
but the connection with the
other fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and
ask them to solve the problem on their side.
Faxes do not store in memory. There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.
Blank areas appear at the
bottom of each page or on
other pages, with a small strip
of text at the top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.
347
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
1
Common Windows problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
during installation.
“General Protection Fault”,
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error occurred”
message appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready
mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.
348
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
2
Common Mac problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine does not print PDF files
correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or
illustrations are missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
Some letters are not displayed normally Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on
during cover page printing.
the cover page.
When printing a document in Mac with
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.
Refer to the Mac User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages.
349
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
3
Common Linux problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine does not print.
•
•
•
Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in the
Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If
not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine from the printers list. Look at the
description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped, press the Start button. Normal operation of the machine
should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occur.
Check if your application has special print options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then
remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the command line parameter in the
command item.
Some color images come out all This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the document is indexed color
black.
space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should
upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at
www.ghostscript.com.
Some color images come out in This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB
unexpected color.
color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you
should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions
at www.ghostscript.com.
The machine does not print
whole pages, and output is
printed on half the page.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been
reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download
the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem.
350
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
I cannot scan via Gimp Front-
end.
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page. For the detailed information,
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application.
If you wish to use another kind of scan application, refer to application’s Help.
“Cannot open port device file” Avoid changing print job parameters (e.q., via LPR GUI) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print
error message appears when
printing a document.
job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port
while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation
occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in the Port configuration window.
The machine does not appear
on the scanners list.
•
•
Ensure your machine is attached to your computer, connected properly via the USB port, and is turned on.
Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open Unified Linux Driver configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine's name is listed in the
window.
•
Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of
them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter “device busy” response. This usually
happens when starting a scan procedure. An appropriate message box appears.
To identify the source of the problem, open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner, port's symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start
at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you can
see if the port is occupied by another application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or
press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly.
The machine does not scan.
•
•
Ensure a document is loaded into the machine, ensure your machine is connected to the computer.
If there is an I/O error while scanning.
351
6. Troubleshooting
Operating system problems
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
4
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used.
Problem
Possible cause
Solution
The PostScript file cannot be
printed
The PostScript driver may not be installed
correctly.
•
•
Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for
printing.
•
If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex.
You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.
A PostScript error page prints
The print job may not be PostScript.
Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software
application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.
The optional tray is not
selected in the driver
The printer driver has not been configured to
recognize the optional tray.
Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the
tray option (see "Setting Device Options" on page 102).
When printing a document in
The resolution setting in the printer driver may
Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in
Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader. Acrobat Reader.
higher, colors print incorrectly
352
6. Troubleshooting
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact
the Samsung customer care center.
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
7095-0077
Web Site
CAMEROON
Country/Region
ALBANIA
Customer Care Center
Web Site
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
CANADA
www.samsung.com/
ca_fr (French)
42 27 5755
ARGENTINE
ARMENIA
0800-333-3733
0-800-05-555
1300 362 603
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
From mobile 02-482 82 00
CHILE
AUSTRALIA
CHINA
400-810-5858
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, €
0.07/min)
COLOMBIA
COSTA RICA
COTE D’LVOIRE
CROATIA
01-8000112112
AUSTRIA
0-800-507-7267
AZERBAIJAN
BAHRAIN
088-55-55-555
8000-4726
8000 0077
062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864)
8009 4000 only from landline
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
BELARUS
810-800-500-55-500
02-201-24-18
CYPRUS
www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch)
BELGIUM
www.samsung.com/
be_fr (French)
CZECH REPUBLIC
Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o., Oasis Florenc,
Sokolovská 394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
BOLIVIA
BOSNIA
800-10-7260
05 133 1999
DENMARK
DOMINICA
ECUADOR
EGYPT
70 70 19 70
1-800-751-2676
1-800-10-7267
08000-726786
0800-124-421
4004-0000
BRAZIL
BULGARIA
07001 33 11
353
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
EIRE
Customer Care Center
0818 717100
Web Site
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
1800 1100 11
Web Site
3030 8282
EL SALVADOR
ESTONIA
800-6225
INDIA
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282
800-7267
FINLAND
030-6227 515
01 48 63 00 00
0800-112-8888
021-5699-7777
INDONESIA
FRANCE
01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 €
0,14/min)
GERMANY
GEORGIA
IRAN
021-8255
ITALY
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-234-7267
0120-327-527
800-22273
8-800-555-555
JAMAICA
JAPAN
0800-10077
GHANA
0302-200077
JORDAN
KAZAKHSTAN
KENYA
80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726
7864) only from land line
GREECE
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile
and land line
0800 724 000
+381 0113216899
183-2255
KOSOVO
KUWAIT
GUATEMALA
HONDURAS
1-800-299-0013
800-27919267
(852) 3698-4698
www.samsung.com
KYRGYZSTAN
LATVIA
00-800-500-55-500
8000-7267
HONG KONG
HUNGARY
www.samsung.com/
hk_en/
LITHUANIA
LUXEMBURG
8-800-77777
261 03 710
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
354
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
MALAYSIA
MACEDONIA
MEXICO
Customer Care Center
1800-88-9999
Web Site
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
Web Site
1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
for PLDT
023 207 777
1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864)for
Digitel
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-800-500-55-500
PHILIPPINES
1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864)for
Globe
MOLDOVA
MONGOLIA
MONTENEGRO
MOROCCO
NIGERIA
02-5805777
020 405 888
0 801-1 SAMSUNG (172-678)
+48 22 607-93-33
POLAND
080 100 2255
0800-726-7864
PORTUGAL
(€ 0,10/min)
PUERTO RICO
1-800-682-3180
NETHERLANDS
08010 SAMSUNG (08010 726
7864) only from landline
NEW ZEALAND
NICARAGUA
NORWAY
OMAN
ROMANIA
00-1800-5077267
815-56 480
(+40) 21 206 01 10 from mobile
and land line
RUSSIA
8-800-555-55-55
9200-21230
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-7267
SAUDI ARABIA
SENEGAL
SERBIA
PANAMA
PERU
800-00-0077
0-800-777-08
SINGAPORE
SLOVAKIA
355
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
SOUTH AFRICA
SPAIN
Customer Care Center
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
Web Site
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
0-800-502-000
Web Site
UKRAINE
www.samsung.com/
ua_ru
SWEDEN
UZBEKISTAN
VENEZUELA
VIETNAM
8-10-800-500-55-500
0-800-100-5303
1 800 588 889
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF
0.08/min)
SWITZERLAND
www.samsung.com/
ch_fr(French)
TADJIKISTAN
TAIWAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
0800-329-999
0266-026-066
TANZANIA
THAILAND
0685 88 99 00
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
TURKEY
U.A.E
444 77 11
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-300 300
UGANDA
U.K
0330 SAMSUNG (7267864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
U.S.A
356
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Glossary
ADF
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as
mentioned in this user’s guide.
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the
paper at once.
802.11
AppleTalk
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE
802).
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
802.11b/g/n
BIT Depth
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly
called as monochrome or black and white.
Access point
BMP
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format
on that platform.
357
Glossary
Glossary
BOOTP
Coverage
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced
operating system.
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For
example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text
on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as
the coverage.
CSV
CCD
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange
data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft
Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among
non-Microsoft platforms.
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage
when you move the machine.
Collation
DADF
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will
automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine
can scan on both sides of the paper.
Control Panel
Default
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,
reset, or initialized.
358
Glossary
Glossary
DHCP
DPI
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of
IP addresses to client hosts.
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail
in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory.
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.
Duplex
DLNA
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with
a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on
a home network to share information with each other across the network.
DNS
Duty Cycle
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a
month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
359
Glossary
Glossary
ECM
EtherTalk
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It
was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor
of TCP/IP networking.
Emulation
FDI
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its
internal state.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an
intranet).
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of
a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
360
Glossary
Glossary
Gateway
IEEE
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that
allows access to another computer or network.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology
related to electricity.
Grayscale
IEEE 1284
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of
gray.
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector
type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,
a printer).
Halftone
Intranet
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a
smaller number of dots.
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
Mass storage device
Mass storage device, commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-
volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating
platters with magnetic surfaces.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet
Protocol standard.
361
Glossary
Glossary
IPM
ITU-T
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within
one minute.
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization
established to standardize and regulate international radio and
telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates
telecommunication.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and
secure printing solution than older ones.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
IPX/SPX
JBIG
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with
no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard
method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
362
Glossary
Glossary
LDAP
MH
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of
data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most
faxes.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status
of a machine.
MMR
MAC address
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-
T T.6.
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
MFP
MR
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a
scanner and etc.
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR
encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
363
Glossary
Glossary
NetWare
OSI
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a
standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of
complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or
rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage
in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from
contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)
developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not
itself copied or derived from something else.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device
independent and resolution independent format.
364
Glossary
Glossary
PostScript
Protocol
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an
interpreter to generate an image.
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
Printer Driver
See PostScript.
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the
printer.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is
usually routed through the switchboard.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
RADIUS
PPM
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote
user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management
of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network
access.
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one
minute.
PRN file
Resolution
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,
the greater the resolution.
365
Glossary
Glossary
SMB
TCP/IP
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication
mechanism.
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of
communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the
Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
SMTP
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission
such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can
be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email
message to the server.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that
is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be
used for pictures that have been made by various image processing
applications.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32
characters.
Toner Cartridge
Subnet Mask
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains
toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms
the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a
combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in
the paper.
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host
address.
366
Glossary
Glossary
TWAIN
Watermark
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac
operating systems.
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter
when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,
Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to
discourage counterfeiting.
UNC Path
WEP
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to
provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one
end point to another.
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the
resource is located.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally
introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
USB
WPA
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB
port to multiple peripherals.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)
computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of
WEP.
367
Glossary
Glossary
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more
advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the
wireless network connection easily without a computer.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-
independent document format.
368
Glossary
|